369 Man

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario,

Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098

Internet: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/

REGI STERED

369 Motor Management Relay

Instruction Manual

369 Revision: 53CMB110.000

Manual P/N: 1601-0077-B3

Copyright 1999 GE Multilin

Manufactured under anISO9001 Registered system.

369 Motor Management Relay i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ANDORDERING

1.1 INTRODUCTION1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 1-1

1.2 ORDERING1.2.1 ORDERING................................................................................................ 1-21.2.2 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................................... 1-21.2.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY .............................................................................. 1-31.2.4 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY.................................................. 1-31.2.5 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY.................................................................. 1-41.2.6 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION...................................................................... 1-5

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 2-12.1.2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ........................................................................... 2-2

2.2 FEATURES2.2.1 PROTECTION FEATURES ....................................................................... 2-32.2.2 METERED QUANTITIES........................................................................... 2-42.2.3 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ......................................................................... 2-4

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS2.3.1 INPUTS...................................................................................................... 2-52.3.2 OUTPUTS.................................................................................................. 2-62.3.3 METERING ................................................................................................ 2-62.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................. 2-62.3.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 2-72.3.6 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 2-92.3.7 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION............................................................... 2-92.3.8 TYPE TEST STANDARDS ........................................................................ 2-92.3.9 PRODUCTION TESTS ............................................................................ 2-10

3. INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION................................................................. 3-1

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION3.2.1 TERMINAL LIST ........................................................................................ 3-33.2.2 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST................................................. 3-53.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST............................................... 3-63.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST .............................................. 3-63.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT ................................................................................. 3-7

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.................................................................... 3-83.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING...................................................................................... 3-93.3.3 CONTROL POWER................................................................................... 3-93.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS.............................................................. 3-93.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS ................................................................ 3-103.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT .................................... 3-113.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS ....................................................... 3-123.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS............................................................... 3-133.3.9 RTD INPUTS ........................................................................................... 3-143.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS..................................................................................... 3-143.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS................................................................................ 3-153.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY ................................................................................. 3-153.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................... 3-16

ii 369 Motor Management Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................... 3-17

3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................... 3-193.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................ 3-20

3.5 CT INSTALLATION3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION .................................................................... 3-223.5.2 5 Amp GROUND CT INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3-233.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION....................................... 3-24

a 3” and 5” WINDOW.................................................................................. 3-24b 8” WINDOW ............................................................................................. 3-25

4. USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE4.1.1 FACEPLATE .............................................................................................. 4-14.1.2 DISPLAY.................................................................................................... 4-14.1.3 LED INDICATORS..................................................................................... 4-24.1.4 RS232 PROGRAM PORT ......................................................................... 4-24.1.5 KEYPAD .................................................................................................... 4-34.1.6 SETPOINT ENTRY.................................................................................... 4-4

4.2 369PC INTERFACE4.2.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 4-54.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPGRADE....................................................................... 4-54.2.3 CONFIGURATION..................................................................................... 4-74.2.4 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE............................................................ 4-84.2.5 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE ...................................................... 4-104.2.6 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ................................................................... 4-114.2.7 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369 ................................. 4-124.2.8 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION .............................. 4-134.2.9 PRINTING................................................................................................ 4-144.2.10 TRENDING .............................................................................................. 4-154.2.11 WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 4-174.2.12 PHASORS ............................................................................................... 4-194.2.13 EVENT RECORDING .............................................................................. 4-214.2.14 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................. 4-23

5. SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU ......................................................................... 5-1

5.2 S1 369 SETUP5.2.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU ..................................................................... 5-55.2.2 SETPOINT ACCESS ................................................................................. 5-65.2.3 DISPLAY PREFERENCES........................................................................ 5-75.2.4 369 COMMUNICATIONS .......................................................................... 5-85.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK................................................................................... 5-95.2.6 WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 5-105.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ..................................................................... 5-115.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES ........................................................................... 5-125.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA ........................................................................... 5-135.2.10 INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES......................................... 5-14

5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP5.3.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU ................................................................... 5-155.3.2 CT/VT SETUP.......................................................................................... 5-165.3.3 MONITORING SETUP............................................................................. 5-18

369 Motor Management Relay iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.3.4 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP ........................................................................ 5-215.3.5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 5-22

5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION5.4.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU ................................................................... 5-235.4.2 THERMAL MODEL .................................................................................. 5-245.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES ............................................................................. 5-255.4.4 UNBALANCE BIAS.................................................................................. 5-315.4.5 MOTOR COOLING .................................................................................. 5-335.4.6 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO..................................................................... 5-355.4.7 RTD BIAS ................................................................................................ 5-365.4.8 OVERLOAD ALARM................................................................................ 5-37

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS5.5.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU ................................................................... 5-385.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT..................................................................................... 5-395.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM ................................................................................. 5-405.5.4 UNDERCURRENT................................................................................... 5-415.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE ........................................................................ 5-425.5.6 GROUND FAULT..................................................................................... 5-44

5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS5.6.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 5 MENU ................................................................... 5-465.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP............................................................................ 5-475.6.3 START INHIBITS ..................................................................................... 5-485.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION ......................................................................... 5-50

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE5.7.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 6 MENU ................................................................... 5-515.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION .................................................................... 5-515.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION................................................................. 5-535.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM ................................................................................. 5-565.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM .......................................................... 5-565.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM .......................................................... 5-57

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS5.8.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 7 MENU ................................................................... 5-585.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE ................................................................................... 5-595.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE...................................................................................... 5-605.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL................................................................................. 5-615.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY.............................................................................. 5-625.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY ................................................................................ 5-63

5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS5.9.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 8 MENU ................................................................... 5-645.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR ......................................................................... 5-665.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR ........................................................................... 5-675.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER............................................................... 5-685.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ............................................................. 5-695.9.6 UNDERPOWER....................................................................................... 5-705.9.7 REVERSE POWER ................................................................................. 5-71

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS5.10.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 9 MENU ................................................................... 5-725.10.2 SPARE SWITCH...................................................................................... 5-735.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART ........................................................................ 5-735.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ........................................................................ 5-735.10.5 SPEED SWITCH...................................................................................... 5-745.10.6 REMOTE RESET..................................................................................... 5-745.10.7 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS ................................................................. 5-75

a GENERAL................................................................................................ 5-75b DIGITAL COUNTER ................................................................................ 5-76

iv 369 Motor Management Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS

c WAVEFORM CAPTURE.......................................................................... 5-76d SIMULATE PRE-FAULT .......................................................................... 5-76e SIMULATE FAULT................................................................................... 5-76f SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT.......................................................... 5-76

5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU ................................................................. 5-775.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS................................................................................ 5-775.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION ..................................... 5-78

5.12 S11 369 TESTING5.12.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU ................................................................. 5-795.12.2 SIMULATION MODE ............................................................................... 5-795.12.3 PRE-FAULT SETUP ................................................................................ 5-805.12.4 FAULT SETUP......................................................................................... 5-815.12.5 FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS ..................................................................... 5-825.12.6 FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS .................................................................. 5-83

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ................................................................ 6-1

6.2 A1 STATUS6.2.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU ............................................................ 6-36.2.2 MOTOR STATUS ..................................................................................... 6-46.2.3 LAST TRIP DATA ...................................................................................... 6-56.2.4 ALARM STATUS ....................................................................................... 6-66.2.5 START INHIBIT STATUS .......................................................................... 6-66.2.6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS .......................................................................... 6-76.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS ........................................................................ 6-76.2.8 REAL TIME CLOCK................................................................................... 6-8

6.3 A2 METERING DATA6.3.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU ............................................................ 6-96.3.2 CURRENT METERING ............................................................................. 6-96.3.3 VOLTAGE METERING ............................................................................ 6-106.3.4 POWER METERING ............................................................................... 6-116.3.5 LOCAL RTD............................................................................................. 6-126.3.6 REMOTE RTD ......................................................................................... 6-136.3.7 DEMAND METERING ............................................................................. 6-146.3.8 PHASORS ............................................................................................... 6-15

6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA6.4.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU .......................................................... 6-166.4.2 MOTOR DATA ......................................................................................... 6-166.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS ........................................................................ 6-186.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS .................................................................... 6-19

6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA6.5.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 4 MENU .......................................................... 6-206.5.2 TRIP COUNTERS.................................................................................... 6-206.5.3 MOTOR STATISTICS.............................................................................. 6-22

6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD6.6.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 5 MENU .......................................................... 6-236.6.2 EVENT 01 ................................................................................................ 6-23

6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION6.7.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 6 MENU .......................................................... 6-256.7.2 MODEL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 6-256.7.3 FIRMWARE VERSION ............................................................................ 6-25

369 Motor Management Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

7. APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON7.1.1 369 AND 269 PLUS COMPARISON ......................................................... 7-1

7.2 369 FAQs7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)........................................... 7-2

7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts7.3.1 DOs and DON’Ts ....................................................................................... 7-4

a DOs............................................................................................................ 7-4b DON'Ts ...................................................................................................... 7-6

7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION.................................................................................. 7-7

a 369 CT Withstand ...................................................................................... 7-7b CT Size and Saturation.............................................................................. 7-7

7.4.2 CT SELECTION......................................................................................... 7-8

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ................................................................... 7-10

7.6 APPLICATIONS7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION............................................................... 7-167.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS........................................... 7-187.6.3 THERMAL MODEL .................................................................................. 7-197.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE............................................................................... 7-207.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION........................................ 7-217.6.6 START INHIBIT ....................................................................................... 7-237.6.7 2φ CT CONFIGURATION ........................................................................ 7-257.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS ........... 7-277.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY ..................................................................................... 7-297.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION ................................... 7-307.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ............................................. 7-327.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING .......................................... 7-33

8. TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP8.1.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 8-18.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ................................................. 8-1

8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST..................................................... 8-28.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST....................................................... 8-28.2.3 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ...................................................... 8-38.2.4 MULTILIN 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST ................................... 8-48.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST ............................................................................ 8-48.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION .................................. 8-78.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................... 8-88.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................... 8-10

8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST ..................................................................... 8-118.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ............................................................ 8-118.3.3 UNBALANCE TEST................................................................................. 8-128.3.4 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST .................................................... 8-148.3.5 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST........................................................................... 8-15

vi 369 Motor Management Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS

9. COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE .................................................................................. 9-1

10. COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ..................................................................... 10-1

10.2 PROTOCOL10.2.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL.................................................................... 10-110.2.2 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE............................................ 10-110.2.3 DATA PACKET FORMAT........................................................................ 10-210.2.4 ERROR CHECKING ................................................................................ 10-310.2.5 TIMING .................................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS10.3.1 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS.................................................... 10-510.3.2 FUNCTION CODES 03 & 04 - READ SETPOINTS & ACTUAL VALUES10-510.3.3 FUNCTION CODE 05 - EXECUTE OPERATION.................................... 10-610.3.4 FUNCTION CODE 06 - STORE SINGLE SETPOINT ............................. 10-710.3.5 FUNCTION CODE 07 - READ DEVICE STATUS ................................... 10-810.3.6 FUNCTION CODE 08 - LOOPBACK TEST............................................. 10-910.3.7 FUNCTION CODE 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS .................... 10-1010.3.8 FUNCTION CODE 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS .......................... 10-11

10.4 ERROR RESPONSES10.4.1 ERROR RESPONSES........................................................................... 10-12

10.5 MEMORY MAP10.5.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION ............................................................ 10-1310.5.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ........................................... 10-1310.5.3 EVENT RECORDER ............................................................................. 10-1410.5.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE........................................................................ 10-14

A. MEMORY MAPPING A.1 MEMORY MAPPINGA.1.1 MEMORY MAP ..........................................................................................A-1A.1.2 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS...........................................................A-29

B. REVISIONS B.1 CHANGE NOTESB.1.1 REVISION HISTORY.................................................................................B-1B.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3 ...............................................................B-1

C. WARRANTY C.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

INDEX

369 Motor Management Relay 1- 1

1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING

11 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.1INTRODUCTION 1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW

The 369 is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and their associatedmechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to ‘learn’ individual motor parameters and toadapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates and acceleration time maybe used to improve the 369’s protective capabilities.

The 369 can offer optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve™ custom over-load curve, or one of the fifteen standard curves.

The 369 has one RS232 front panel port, and three RS485 rear ports. Modbus RTU protocol is standard to allports. Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad or by using the 369PC software and a computer. Status,actual values and troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communica-tions. A simulation mode and pickup indicator allow testing and verification of correct operation without requir-ing a relay test set.

As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearings, ambientor driven equipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is theremote RTD module which can be linked to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection.

The optional metering package provides VT inputs for voltage and power elements. It also provides meteringof V, kW, kvar, kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Four user configurable analog outputs are included with this option.

The Back-Spin Detection (B) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enabletimely and safe motor restarting.

369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgrades arevia an option enabling passcode available from GE Multilin, which is unique to each relay and option.

1-2 369 Motor Management Relay

1.2 ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING

11.2 ORDERING 1.2.1 ORDERING

To order, select the basic model and the desired features from the selection guide below:

Notes: The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders.If a feature is not required, a 0 must be placed in the order code. All order codes have 8 digits.The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only.

Examples: 369-HI-R-0-0-0 - 369 with HI voltage control power and 12 RTD inputs369-LO-0-M-0-0 - 369 relay with LO voltage control power and metering option

Location: GE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioCanada L6E 1B3Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098

1.2.2 ACCESSORIES

369PC Program Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay.

RRTD Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. Allowsremote metering and programming for up to 12 RTDs. Complete with connecting fibreoptic cable.

F485 Converts communications between RS232 and RS485/fibre optic. Used to interface acomputer to the relay.

CT 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1A or 5A secondaries)

HGF Ground CTs (50:0.025) used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistancegrounded systems.

515 Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation.

DEMO Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted.

FPC15 Remote faceplate cable, 15'.

369 * * * * *

369 Base unit (no RTD)HI 50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC control powerLO 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC control power

R Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in)0 No optional RTD inputs

M Optional metering packageB Optional backspin detection (incl. metering)0 No optional metering or backspin detection

F Optional Fiber Optic Port0 No optional Fiber Optic Port

P Optional Profibus protocol interface0 No optional Profibus protocol interface


1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.2 ORDERING

11.2.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY

1.2.4 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY

FIRMWAREREVISION

BOOT CODEREVISION

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES RELEASE DATE

53CMA000.000 53BMA000.000 Alpha Test Code ?, 1998

PC PROGRAMREVISION

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES RELEASE DATE

000 Alpha Test Code ?, 1998


1.2 ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING

11.2.5 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY

Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW


1 INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING 1.2 ORDERING

11.2.6 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION

1. The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory.

2. The serial number of the 369.

3. The firmware that was installed in the 369 when it left the factory. Note that this may no longer be the cur-rent firmware in the relay as firmware may upgraded in the field. The current firmware revision may bechecked in the Actual Values section of the 369.

4. Specifications for the output relay contacts.

5. Certifications the 369 conforms with or has been approved to.

6. Factory installed options. These are based on the order code. Note that the 369 may have had optionsupgraded in the field. The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this.

7. Control power ratings for the 369 as ordered. Based on the HI/LO rating from the order code.

8. Pollution degree.

9. Overvoltage Category.

10. IP code.

11. Modification number for any factory ordered mods. Note that the 369 may have had modifications added inthe field. The Actual Values section of the 369 may be checked to verify this.

12. Insulative voltage rating.


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

2

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS 2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

Motor protection and management shall be providedby a digital relay.

Protective functions shall include:

• phase overload standard curves (51)

• overload by custom programmable curve (51)

• I2t modeling (49)

• current unbalance / single phase detection (46)

• starts per hour and time between starts

• short circuit (50)

• ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N)

• mechanical jam / stall

Optional functions shall include:

• under / overvoltage (27/59)

• phase reversal (47)

• underpower (37)

• power factor (55)

• stator / bearing overtemperature with 12 inde-pendent RTD inputs (49/38)

• backspin detection

Management functions shall include:

• statistical data

• pre-trip data (last 40 events)

• ability to learn, display and integrate criticalparameters to maximize motor protection

• a keypad with 40 character display

• flash memory

The relay shall be capable of displaying importantmetering functions, including phase voltages, kilo-watts, kilovars, power factor, frequency and MWhr. Inaddition, undervoltage and low power factor alarmand trip levels shall be field programmable. The com-munications interface shall include one front RS232port and three independent rear RS485 ports withsupporting PC software, thus allowing easy setpointprogramming, local retrieval of information and flexi-bility in communication with SCADA and engineeringworkstations.


2.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

2.1.2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

50G52

4 ISOLATEDANALOGOUTPUTS

METERINGV, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz

METERINGA, Celsius

369Motor Management

Relay

369Motor Management

Relay

CONTROL

AUXILIARYRELAY

AUXILIARYRELAY

ALARMRELAYALARMRELAY

SERVICE

BLOCKSTARTBLOCKSTART

Comm. toRTD module

Comm. toRTD module

REMOTE RTDMODULE

(12 RTD INPUTS)

REMOTE RTDMODULE

(12 RTD INPUTS)

(Fiber Optic)(Fiber Optic)

(Option F)(Option F)

51 37

50

BACKUP

OPTIONAL METERING (M)

BUS

VV

55

50

27 47 59

52b

TRIP

14

87

49 38

86

74

14

87

SPEED DEVICE

3

DIFFERENTIAL

INPUTS

RTDs

AMBIENT AIR

BREAKEROR FUSED

CONTACTOR

RS232

START

RS485

RS485

RS485

STATOR

BEARING

AMBIENT

840701A9.CDR

RELAY CONTACTS

AMBIENT

STATOR

BEARING

50G51G

4666

MOTORLOAD

OPTIONAL RTD ( R )

12 RTD INPUTS

OPTIONAL RTD ( R )

12 RTD INPUTS

OPTION ( B )

BACKSPIN

DETECTION

OPTION ( B )

BACKSPIN

DETECTION


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 FEATURES

2

2.2 FEATURES 2.2.1 PROTECTION FEATURES

ANSI/IEEEDevice

Protection Feature Option Trip AlarmBlockStart

14 Speed Switch •27 Undervoltage M • • •37 Undercurrent / Underpower /M • •38 Bearing RTD R or RRTD • •46 Current Unbalance • •47 Voltage Phase Reversal M •49 Stator RTD R or RRTD • •50 Short Circuit & Backup •

50G Instantaneous Ground Overcurrent & Backup • •51G Timed Ground Overcurrent • •51 Overload • • •55 Power Factor M • •59 Overvoltage M • •66 Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts •74 Alarm •81 Over/Under Frequency M • •86 Lockout •87 Differential Switch •

General Switch • •Reactive Power M • •Thermal Capacity •Start Inhibit (thermal capacity available) •Restart Block (Backspin Timer) •Mechanical Jam • •Acceleration Timer •Ambient RTD R or RRTD • •Short/Low temp RTD R or RRTD •Broken/Open RTD R or RRTD •Loss of RRTD Communications RRTD •Trip Counter •Self Test/Service •Backspin Detection B •Current Demand •kW Demand M •kvar Demand M •kVA Demand M •Starter Failure •Reverse Power M •


2.2 FEATURES 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

2.2.2 METERED QUANTITIES

2.2.3 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Metered Quantity Units Option

Phase Currents and Current Demand Amps

Motor Load xFLA

Unbalance Current %

Ground Current Amps

Input Switch Status Open / Closed

Relay Output Status (De) Energized

RTD Temperature ° C or ° F R

Backspin Frequency Hz B

Phase/Line Voltages Volts M

Frequency Hz M

Power Factor lead / lag M

Real Power and Real Power Demand Watts M

Reactive Power and Reactive Power Demand Vars M

Apparent Power and Apparent Power Demand VA M

Real Power Consumption kWhrs M

Reactive Power Consumption/Generation +/- kvarhrs M

Feature Option

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Profibus DP rear communication port P

User Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200)

Flash Memory for easy firmware updates

Front RS232 communication port

Rear RS485 communication port

Rear fiber optic port F

RTD type is user definable R or RRTD

4 User Definable Analog Outputs (0-1, 0-20, 4-20 mA) M

Windows based PC program for setting up and monitoring


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2

2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Specifications are subject to change without notice.2.3.1 INPUTS

CONTROL POWER

DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTSInputs: 6 optically isolatedInput type: Dry Contact (<800Ω)Function: Programmable

GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT)CT Input (rated): 1A/5A secondary and 50:0.025CT Primary: 1-5000A (1A/5A)Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x CT primary (1A/5A)

0.05 to 16.0A (50:0.025)Full Scale: 1.0 x CT primary (1A/5A)

16A (50:0.025)Frequency: 20-300HzConversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sampleAccuracy: ±1.0% of full scale (1A/5A)

±0.07A @ < 1A (50:0.025)±0.20A @ < 16A (50:0.025)

PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT(VT) (Option M)VT ratio: 1.00-240.00:1 in steps of 0.01VT Secondary: 240VAC (full scale)Range: 0.05-1.00 x full scaleFrequency: 20-120HzConversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sampleAccuracy: ±1.0% of full scaleBurden: >200kΩMax. Continuous: 280VAC

Type: LO: DC:20-60VDC

AC: 20-48VAC50/60Hz

HI: DC:90-300VDC

AC:70-265VAC50/60Hz

Power: nominal: 20VA

maximum: 65VA

Holdup: non-failsafe trip: 200ms

failsafe trip: 100ms

PHASE CURRENT INPUTS (CT)

CT Input (rated): 1A and 5A secondary

CT Primary: 1-5000A

Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT primary Amps

Full Scale: 20 x CT primary Amps

or 65535 Amps maximum

Frequency: 20-300Hz

Conversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sample

Accuracy: @ ≤2 x CT ±0.5% of 2 x CT

@ >2 x CT ±1% of 20 x CT

PHASE CT BURDEN

PHASE CTINPUT BURDEN

(A) VA (Ω)

1A

1 0.03 0.03

5 0.64 0.03

20 11.7 0.03

5A

5 0.07 0.003

25 1.71 0.003

100 31 0.003

PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND

PHASECT

WITHSTAND TIME

1s 2s continuous

1A 100xCT 40xCT 3xCT


GROUND CT BURDENGROUND INPUT BURDEN

CT (A) VA (Ω)

1A

1 0.04 0.036

5 0.78 0.031

20 6.79 0.017

5A

5 0.07 0.003

25 1.72 0.003

100 25 0.003

50:0.025

0.025 0.24 384

0.1 2.61 261

0.5 37.5 150

GROUND CT CURRENT WITHSTAND

GROUND CTWITHSTAND TIME

1s 2s Continuous



50:0.025 10A 5A 150mA


2.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

RTD INPUTS (Option R)Wire Type: 3 wireSensor Type: 100Ω platinum (DIN 43760)

100Ω nickel,120Ω nickel,10Ω cop-per

RTD Sensing Current:3mARange: -40 to 200° C or -40 to 392° FAccuracy: ±2° C or ±4° F

Lead Resistance: 25Ω max. for Pt and Ni type3Ω max. for Cu type

Isolation: 36Vpk

BSD INPUTS (Option B)Frequency: 2 - 120 HzDynamic BSD Range:2mV - 575V RMSAccuracy: ±0.02 Hz

2.3.2 OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M)

Accuracy: ±1% of full scaleIsolation: 50V isolated active source

OUTPUT RELAYS

2.3.3 METERING

POWER METERING (Option M) EVENT RECORDCapacity: last 40 events

Triggers: trip, inhibit, power fail, alarms, selftest

WAVEFORM CAPTURELength: 1 of 64 cycles to 16 of 7 cycles

Trigger Position: 1-100% pre-trip to post-trip

Trigger: trip, manually via communicationsor digital input

2.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS

FRONT PORTType: RS232

Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200

Protocol: Modbus® RTU

Non-Isolated

BACK PORTS (3)Type: RS485Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200Protocol: Modbus® RTU36V Isolation (together)

FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)Optional Use: RTD remote module hookup

Baud Rate: 1200 to 19200

Proticol Modbus® RTU

PROFIBUS PORT (Option P)Type: RS232

Baud Rate: 1200 baud to 12 Mbaud

Protocol: Profibus DP

Programmable

Output 0-1 mA 0-20mA 4-20mA

Max Load 2400Ω 600Ω 600ΩMax Output 1.01mA 20.2mA 20.2mA

Resistive load(pf = 1)

Inductive load(pf = 0.4)(L/R - 7ms)

Rated load8A @ 250VAC8A @ 30VDC

3.5A @ 250VAC3.5A @ 30VDC

Carry current 8A

Max switching capacity2000VA240W

875VA170W

Max switching V 380VAC 125VDC

Max switching I 8A

Operate time <10ms (5ms typical)

Contact material silver alloy

ParameterAccuracy(full scale)

Resolution Range

kW ±2% 1 kW 0−50000

kvar ±2% 1 kvar ±32000

kVA ±2% 1 kVA 0−50000

kWh ±2% 0.001 MWh 0-999,999.999

±kvarh ±2% 0.001 Mvarh ±999,999.999

Power Factor ±1% 0.01 ±0.00 - 1.00

Frequency ±0.02 Hz 0.01 Hz 20.00 - 300.00

kW Demand ±2% 1 kW 0-50000

kvar Demand ±2% 1 kvar ±32000

kVA Demand ±2% 1 kVA 0-50000

Amp Demand ±2% 1 A 0-65535



2

2.3.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODELCurve Shape: 1-15 standard, custom

Curve Biasing: unbalance, temperature,

hot/cold ratio, cool time constants

Pickup Level: 1.01-1.25 x FLA

Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputs

Dropout Level: 96-98% of pickup

Timing Accuracy: ±100ms or ±2% of total trip time

THERMAL CAPACITY ALARMPickup Level: 1-100% TC in steps of 1

Pickup Accuracy: ±2%


Timing Accuracy: ±100ms

OVERLOAD ALARMPickup Level: 1.01-1.50 x FLA in steps of 0.01



Time Delay: 0.1-60.0s in steps of 0.1

Timing Accuracy: ±100ms or ±2% of total trip time

50 SHORT CIRCUITPickup Level: 2.0-20.0 x CT in steps of 0.1



Time Delay: 0-255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s

Backup Delay: 0.10-255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s

Timing Accuracy: +50ms for delays < 50ms

±100ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

MECHANICAL JAMPickup Level: 1.01-6.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01



Time Delay: 0.5-125.0 s in steps of 0.5

Timing Accuracy: ±250ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

37 UNDERCURRENTPickup Level: 0.10-0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01



Time Delay: 1-255 s in steps of 1

Start Delay: 0-15000 s in steps of 1

Timing Accuracy: ±500ms or ±0.5% of total time

46 UNBALANCEPickup Level: 4-30% in steps of 1


Dropout Level: 1-2% below pickup

Time Delay: 1-255 s in steps of 1



50G/51G 50N/51N GROUND FAULTPickup Level: 0.10-1.00 x CT for 1A/5A CT

0.25-25.00 A for 50:0.025 CT

Pickup Accuracy: as per ground current inputs


Time Delay: 0-255.00 s in steps of 0.01s

Backup Delay: 0.01-255.00 s in steps of 0.01s



ACCELERATION TRIPPickup Level: motor start condition

Dropout Level: motor run, trip or stop condition



38/49 RTD and RRTD PROTECTIONPickup Level: 1-200° C or 34-392° F

Pickup Accuracy: ±2° C or ±4° F


Time Delay: <5 s

OPEN RTD ALARMPickup Level: detection of an open RTD

Pickup Accuracy: >1000ΩDropout Level: 96-98% of pickup

Time Delay: <5 s

SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARMPickup Level: <-40° C or -40° F

Pickup Accuracy: ±2° C or ±4° F


Time Delay: <5 s

LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARMPickup Level: no communication

Time Delay: 2-5 s

27 UNDERVOLTAGEPickup Level: 0.50-0.99 x rated in steps of 0.01

Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputs



Start Delay: seperate level for start conditions



59 OVERVOLTAGEPickup Level: 1.01-1.25 x rated in steps of 0.01



2

Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputs




47 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSALPickup Level: phase reversal detected

Time Delay: 500-700ms

81 UNDERFREQUENCYPickup Level: 20.00-70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz

Dropout Level: 0.05 Hz




81 OVERFREQUENCYPickup Level: 20.00-70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 Hz

Dropout Level: 0.05 Hz




55 LEAD POWER FACTORPickup Level: 0.99-0.05 in steps of 0.01

Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02

Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickup




55 LAG POWER FACTORPickup Level: 0.99-0.05 in steps of 0.01

Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02

Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickup




POSITIVE REACTIVE POWERPickup Level: 1-25000 in steps of 1






NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWERPickup Level: 1-25000 kvar in steps of 1






37 UNDERPOWERPickup Level: 1-25000 kW in steps of 1






REVERSE POWERPickup Level: 1-25000 kW in steps of 1






87 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCHTime Delay: <200ms

14 SPEED SWITCHTime Delay: 0.5-100.0 s in steps of 0.5


GENERAL SWITCHTime Delay: 0.1-5000.0 s in steps of 0.1



DIGITAL COUNTERPickup: on count equaling level

Time Delay: <200 ms

TRIP COUNTERPickup: on count equaling level

Time Delay: <200 ms



2

STARTER FAILUREPickup Level: motor run condition when tripped

Dropout Level: motor stopped condition

Time Delay: 10-1000 ms in steps of 10


CURRENT DEMAND ALARMDemand Period: 5-90 min in steps of 1

Pickup Level: 10-100000 A in steps of 1



Time Delay: <2 min

kW DEMAND ALARMDemand Period: 5-90 min in steps of 1

Pickup Level: 1-50000 kW in steps of 1



Time Delay: <2 min

kvar DEMAND ALARMDemand Period: 5-90 min in steps of 1

Pickup Level: 1-50000 kvar in steps of 1



Time Delay: <2 min

kVA DEMAND ALARMDemand Period: 5-90 min in steps of 1

Pickup Level: 1-50000 kVA in steps of 1



Time Delay: <2 min

BACKSPIN DETECTIONMin. Voltage: 30-15000 mV

Pickup Level: 3-300 Hz in steps of 1

Dropout Level: 2-30 Hz in steps or 1

Level Accuracy: ±2 Hz

Time Delay: 1-50000s in steps of 1


2.3.6 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

AMBIENT TEMPERATUREOperating Range: -40° C to +60° C

Storage Range: -40° C to +80° C

HUMIDITYUp to 95% non condensing

DUST/MOISTUREIP50

VENTILATIONNo special ventilation required as long as ambient temper-ature remains within specifications. Ventilation may berequired in enclosures exposed to direct sunlight.

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II

CLEANINGMay be cleaned with a damp cloth.

NOTE: Relay must be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.

2.3.7 APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION

ISO: Designed and manufactured to anISO9001 registered process.

CSA: Pending

UL: Pending

CE: Pending

2.3.8 TYPE TEST STANDARDS

SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY:ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5kV/1MHz)

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5kV/10ns)

IEC EN61000-4-4, Level 4

INSULATION RESISTANCE:IEC255-5

IMPULSE TEST:Per IEC 255-5 Section 8

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH:

ANSI/IEEE C37.90

IEC 255-6

CSA C22.2

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE:EN61000-4-2, Level 3

IEC 801-2

SURGE IMMUNITY:EN61000-4-5

CURRENT WITHSTAND:ANSI/IEEE C37.90

IEC 255-6



2

RFI:ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, 35V/m

EN61000-4-3

EN50082-2 @ 10V

CONDUCTED/RADIATED EMISSIONS:EN 55011 (CISPR 11)

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY WITH ACCURACY:ANSI/IEEE C37.90

IEC 255-6

IEC 68-2-38 Part 2

VIBRATION:IEC 255-21-1 Class 2

IEC 255-21-2 Class 2

VOLTAGE DEVIATION:EN61000-4-11

MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY:EN61000-4-8

2.3.9 PRODUCTION TESTS

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH:All high voltage inputs at 2kVac for 1 minute

BURN IN:8 hours @ 60° C sampling plan

CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONALITY:100% hardware functionality tested

100% calibration of all metered quantities


3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3

3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

The 369 is contained in a compact plastic housing with the keypad, display, communication port and all indica-tors/targets on the front panel. The physical dimensions are given in Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS.

The 369 should be positioned so that the display and keypad are accessible. To mount the relay: a cutout ismade, and mounting holes drilled as shown in Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS. Mounting hardware con-sisting of bolts and washers are provided with the relay.

Although the 369 is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference the relay should be mountedaway from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.

Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS

840703B5.DW G

UFRON T VIEW USIDE VIEW

Inches(m m )

UREAR VIEW

(29

6)

11.6

7"

(205)8.07"

10

.87

5"

(4 PLACES)0.218" (6) DIA.

CU T-OUT

(27

6)

(156)6.125"

(174)6.85"

10

.45

"(2

65

)

(155)6.125"

6.65"(169)

10

.87

5"

(27

6)

SURFACEMOUNTING

10

.24

"(2

60

)

4 .23"(107)

M O TO R M A N A GE M E N T R E L AY

RRTD

METERING

COM1

COM2SERVICE

AUX.2

AUX.1

ALARM

369

TRIP

R

BSD

CEgM U LT I L I N

I NP U T P OWE R:

MOD EL : 3 69-H I -R-M-F -0

MAX IMU MC ONTACT RATIN G

250VAC 10A RESISTIVE1/4HP 125VAC 1/2 HP 250 VAC

S ER I AL N o : M53 B9 90 000 24

F IR MWA R E: 53 A7 00C 0 .0 00

P OLLU T ION D EGR E E: 2I P C OD E: XO

90 -300 V D C

70 -265 V A C57 8mA M AX .

50 /6 0H z or D C MOD :

12 R T D s:

ME TE R IN G

F IB E R OP TI C P OR T

O P T I O N S

I NS U LA TI V E V OLTA GE: 2

N /AOV ER V OLTA GE C AT AGOR Y: 2


3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

Figure 3–2: SPLIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS


3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

3

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.1 TERMINAL LIST

Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST

TERMINAL WIRING CONNECTION

1 RTD1 +

2 RTD1 COM

3 RTD1 -

4 RTD1 SHIELD

5 RTD2 +

6 RTD2 COM

7 RTD2 -

8 RTD2 SHIELD

9 RTD3 +

10 RTD3 COM

11 RTD3 -

12 RTD3 SHIELD

13 RTD4 +

14 RTD4 COM

15 RTD4 -

16 RTD4 SHIELD

17 RTD5 +

18 RTD5 COM

19 RTD5 -

20 RTD5 SHIELD

21 RTD6 +

22 RTD6 COM

23 RTD6 -

24 RTD6 SHIELD

25 RTD7 +

26 RTD7 COM

27 RTD7 -

28 RTD7 SHIELD

29 RTD8 +

30 RTD8 COM

31 RTD8 -

32 RTD8 SHIELD

33 RTD9 +

34 RTD9 COM

35 RTD9 -

36 RTD9 SHIELD

37 RTD10 +

38 RTD10 COM

39 RTD10 -

40 RTD10 SHIELD

41 RTD11 +

42 RTD11 COM

43 RTD11 -

44 RTD11 SHIELD

45 RTD12 +

46 RTD12 COM

47 RTD12 -

48 RTD12 SHIELD

51 SPARE SW

52 SPARE SW COM

53 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW

54 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COM

55 SPEED SW

56 SPEED SW COM

57 ACCESS SW

58 ACCESS SW COM

59 EMERGENCY RESTART SW

60 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM

61 EXTERNAL RESET SW

62 EXTERNAL RESET SW COM

71 COMM1 RS485 +

72 COMM1 RS485 -

73 COMM1 SHIELD

74 COMM2 RS485 +

75 COMM2 RS485 -

76 COMM2 SHIELD

77 COMM3 RS485 +

78 COMM3 RS485 -

79 COMM3 SHIELD

80 ANALOG OUT 1

81 ANALOG OUT 2

82 ANALOG OUT 3

83 ANALOG OUT 4

84 ANALOG COM

85 ANALOG SHIELD

90 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE

91 BACKSPIN NEUTRAL

92 PHASE A CURRENT 5A

93 PHASE A CURRENT 1A

94 PHASE A COM

95 PHASE B CURRENT 5A

96 PHASE B CURRENT 1A

97 PHASE B COM

98 PHASE C CURRENT 5A

99 PHASE C CURRENT 1A

100 PHASE C COM

101 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A

102 NEUT/GND CURRENT 1A

103 NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A

104 NEUT/GND COM

105 PHASE A VOLTAGE

106 PHASE A NEUT

107 PHASE B VOLTAGE

Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST (Continued)



3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

108 PHASE B NEUT

109 PHASE C VOLTAGE

110 PHASE C NEUT

111 TRIP NC

112 TRIP COM

113 TRIP NO

114 ALARM NC

115 ALARM COM

116 ALARM NO

117 AUX1 NC

118 AUX1 COM

119 AUX1 NO

120 AUX2 NC

121 AUX2 COM

122 AUX2 NO

123 POWER FILTER GROUND

124 POWER LINE

125 POWER NEUTRAL

126 POWER SAFETY

Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST (Continued)




3

3.2.2 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

Table 3–2: 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

269 WIRING CONNECTION 369

1 RTD1 + 1

2 RTD1 COM 2

3 RTD1 - 3

4 RTD1 SHIELD 4

5 RTD2 + 5

6 RTD2 COM 6

7 RTD2 - 7

8 RTD2 SHIELD 8

9 RTD3 + 9

10 RTD3 COM 10

11 RTD3 - 11

12 RTD3 SHIELD 12

71 RTD4 + 13

70 RTD4 COM 14

69 RTD4 - 15

68 RTD4 SHIELD 16

67 RTD5 + 17

66 RTD5 COM 18

65 RTD5 - 19

64 RTD5 SHIELD 20

63 RTD6 + 21

62 RTD6 COM 22

61 RTD6 - 23

60 RTD6 SHIELD 24

13 RTD7 + 25

14 RTD7 COM 26

15 RTD7 - 27

16 RTD7 SHIELD 28

17 RTD8 + 29

18 RTD8 COM 30

19 RTD8 - 31

20 RTD8 SHIELD 32

21 RTD9 + 33

22 RTD9 COM 34

23 RTD9 - 35

24 RTD9 SHIELD 36

25 RTD10 + 37

26 RTD10 COM 38

27 RTD10 - 39

28 RTD10 SHIELD 40

44 SPARE SW 51

45 SPARE SW COM 52

48 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW 53

49 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COM 54

50 SPEED SW 55

51 SPEED SW COM 56

52 ACCESS SW 57

53 ACCESS SW COM 58

54 EMERGENCY RESTART SW 59

55 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM 60

56 EXTERNAL RESET SW 61

57 EXTERNAL RESET SW COM 62

47 COMM1 RS485 + 71

46 COMM1 RS485 - 72

88 COMM1 SHIELD 73

59 ANALOG OUT 1 80

58 ANALOG COM 88

83 PHASE A CURRENT 1A 93

82 PHASE A COM 94


80 PHASE B CURRENT 1A 96

79 PHASE B COM 97


77 PHASE C CURRENT 1A 99

76 PHASE C COM 100


73 NEUT/GND COM 104

72 NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A 103

74 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A 101

29 TRIP NC 111

30 TRIP COM 112

31 TRIP NO 113

32 ALARM NC 114

33 ALARM COM 115

34 ALARM NO 116

35 AUX1 NC 117

36 AUX1 COM 118

37 AUX1 NO 119

38 AUX2 NC 120

39 AUX2 COM 121

40 AUX2 NO 122

42 POWER FILTER GROUND 123

41 POWER LINE 124

43 POWER NEUTRAL 125

Terminals not available on the 369

84 MTM B+ N/A

85 MTM A- N/A

86 SPARE2 SW N/A

87 SPARE SW COM N/A

Table 3–2: 269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST(Continued)

269 WIRING CONNECTION 369


3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

Table 3–3: MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

MTM WIRING CONNECTION 369


2 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105

3 PHASE B VOLTAGE 107


5 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109

6 PHASE A COM 94



9 PHASE B COM 97



12 PHASE C COM 100



15 COMM1 RS485 + 71

16 COMM1 RS485 - 72

17 COMM1 SHIELD 73

18 ANALOG OUT 1 80

19 ANALOG OUT1 COM 84

20 ANALOG OUT 2 81

21 ANALOG OUT 2 COM 84

22 ANALOG OUT 3 82


24 ANALOG OUT 4 83


26 ANALOG SHIELD 85

27 ALARM NC 114

28 ALARM COM 115

29 ALARM NO 116

31 SPARE SW 51

32 SPARE SW COM 52

34 POWER LINE 124

35 POWER NEUTRAL 125


30 PULSE OUTPUT (P/O) N/A

33 SW.B N/A

Table 3–3: MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST(Continued)

MTM WIRING CONNECTION 369

Table 3–4: MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

MPM WIRING CONNECTION 369

1 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105


3 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109

4 PHASE NEUT 108


6 POWER SAFETY 126

7 POWER NEUTRAL 125

8 POWER LINE 124



11 PHASE A COM 94



14 PHASE B COM 97



17 PHASE C COM 100

28 ANALOG OUT 1 80

27 ANALOG OUT 2 81

26 ANALOG OUT 3 82

25 ANALOG OUT 4 83

24 ANALOG COM 84

21 ANALOG SHIELD 85

43 ALARM NC 114

44 ALARM COM 115

45 ALARM NO 116

46 COMM1 SHIELD 73

47 COMM1 RS485 - 72

48 COMM1 RS485 + 71


31 SWITHCH INPUT 1 N/A

32 SWITCH INPUT 2 N/A

33 SWITCH COM N/A

Table 3–4: MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST(Continued)

MPM WIRING CONNECTION 369



3

3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT

Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT


3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING


3 INSTALLATION 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3

3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING

The 369 can be connected to cover a broad range of applications and thus wiring will vary dependent upon theuser’s protection scheme. The information contained within this section will cover most of the typical intercon-nections to the 369.

For explanation purposes in this section, the terminals have been logically grouped together. A typical wiringdiagram for the 369 is shown in Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING and the terminal arrangement has beendetailed in Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT.

For further information on specific wiring applications not covered here, please refer to Chapter 8, Applications,or contact the factory for further information.

3.3.3 CONTROL POWER

The power supply built into the 369 is a switchmode supply. It can operate with either AC or DC voltage appliedto it.

Extensive filtering and transient protection has been incorporated into the 369 to ensure reliable operation inharsh industrial environments. Transient energy is removed from the relay and conducted to ground via theground terminal. This terminal must be connected to the cubicle ground bus a 10AWG wire or a ground braid.Do not daisy chain grounds with other relays or devices. Each should have its own connection to the groundbus.

The internal supply is protected via a 2A slo-blo fuse that is accessible for replacement. If it must be replacedensure that it is replaced with a fuse of equal ratings and that the cause of failure has been determined andeliminated.

3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS

The 369 requires one CT for each of the three motor phase currents to be input into the relay. There are nointernal ground connections for the CT inputs. Refer to the Applications chapter for a note on a 2 CT connec-tion.

The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLA of the motor being protected is no less than 50% of therated CT primary. Ideally to ensure maximum accuracy and resolution the CTs should be chosen such that theFLA is 100% of CT primary or slightly less. The maximum CT primary is 5000A.

The 369 will measure 0.1 to 20x CT primary rated current. The CTs chosen must be capable of driving the 369burden (see specifications) during normal and fault conditions to ensure correct operation. See the Applica-tions chapter for a note on calculating total burden and CT rating.

For the correct operation of many protective elements the phase sequence and CT polarity is critical. Ensurethat the convention illustrated in the typical wiring diagram, Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING, is followed.

CAUTION: VERIFY THAT THE CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY IS WITHIN THERANGE COVERED BY THE ORDERED 369 RELAY’S CONTROL POWER.

Table 3–5: 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES

369 POWER SUPPLY AC RANGE DC RANGE

HI 60-265 60-300

LO 20-48 20-60



3

3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS

The 369 has an isolating transformer with separate 1A, 5A and sensitive HGF (50:0.025) ground terminals.Only one ground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no internal ground connections on the groundcurrent inputs.

The maximum ground CT primary for the 1A/5A taps is 5000A. Alternatively the sensitive ground input,50:0.025, can be used to detect ground current on high resistance grounded systems.

The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a residual connection.Note that only 1A and 5A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection. A typical residual connec-tion is illustrated in Figure 3.5. The zero sequence connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zerosequence connection is recommended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor,resistance of the power system, motor core saturation density, etc. may cause false readings in the residuallyconnected ground fault circuit.

Figure 3–5: TYPICAL RESIDUAL CONNECTION



3

3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT

The exact placement of a zero sequence CT, so that ground fault current will properly be detected, is shown inFigure 3–6: ZERO SEQUENCE CT. If the CT is placed over a shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase cur-rent into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground current unless the shield wire is alsopassed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.

Figure 3–6: ZERO SEQUENCE CT



3

3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS

The 369 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an internal isolating transformer. There are nointernal fuses or ground connections on these inputs. The maximum VT ratio is 240:1. These inputs are onlyenabled when the metering option (M) is ordered.

The 369 accepts either open delta or wye connected VTs (see Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION). Thevoltage channels are connected wye internally, which means that the jumper shown on the delta connectionbetween the phase B input and the VT neutral terminals must be installed.

Polarity and phase sequence for the VTs is critical for correct power and rotation measurement and should beverified before starting the motor. As long as the polarity markings on the primary and secondary windings ofthe VT are aligned, there is no phase shift. The markings can be aligned on either side of the VT.

VTs are typically mounted upstream of the motor breaker or contactor. On variable speed drives the VTs mustbe mounted on the output (motor) side of the drive along with the CTs for correct power readings.

Typically a 1A fuse is used to protect the voltage inputs.

Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION



3

3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS

These voltage inputs are only enabled if the optional backspin detection (B) feature has been purchased forthe relay. These inputs enable the 369 to detect whether the motor is spinning after the primary power hasbeen removed (breaker or contactor opened).

These inputs must be supplied by a separate VT mounted downstream (motor side) of the breaker or contac-tor.

The correct wiring is as illustrated in Figure 3–8: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING.

Figure 3–8: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING



3

3.3.9 RTD INPUTS

The 369 can monitor up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator, Bearing, Ambient, or Other temperature applications. Thetype of each RTD is field programmable as: 100Ω Platinum (DIN.43760), 100Ω Nickel, 120Ω Nickel, or 10ΩCopper. RTDs must be the three wire type. There are no provisions for the connection of thermistors.

The 369 RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is the samelength. Lead resistance should not exceed 25Ω per lead for platinum and nickel type RTDs or 3Ω per lead forCopper type RTDs.

Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in industrial environments. RTD cables should be keptclose to grounded metal casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference. RTD leadsshould not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires.

The shield connection terminal of the RTD is grounded in the 369 and should not be connected to ground atthe motor or anywhere else to prevent noise pickup from circulating currents.

If 10Ω Copper RTDs are used special care should be taken to keep the lead resistance as low as possible tomaintain accurate readings.

Figure 3–9: RTD INPUTS

3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS

Other than the ACCESS switch input the other 5 digital inputs are programmable. These programmable digitalinputs have default settings to match the functions of the 269Plus switch inputs (differential, speed, emergencyrestart, remote reset and spare). However in addition to their default settings they can also be programmed foruse as generic inputs to set up trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs.

A twisted pair of wires should be used for digital input connections.

CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT LIVE CIRCUITS TO THE 369 DIGITAL INPUTS. THEYARE DESIGNED FOR DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY.

4

Com

ShieldShield

Hot

Compensation

Return

12

1

2

3

SAFETY GROUND

RT

DS

EN

SIN

G

RT

D#1

369 RELAYMOTOR

STARTER

MOTOR3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE

RTDTERMINALSIN MOTORSTARTER

RTD TERMINALSAT MOTOR

Maximum total lead resistance25 ohms (Platinum & Nickel RTDs)3 ohms (Copper RTDs)

Route cable in separate conduit fromcurrent carrying conductors

RTD INMOTORSTATORORBEARING

840717A1.CDR



3

3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS

The 369 provides 4 analog current output channels with the metering option (M). These outputs are field pro-grammable to a full-scale range of either 0-1 mA (into a maximum 10 kΩ impedance) and 4-20 or 0-20mA (intoa maximum 600 Ω impedance).

As shown in the typical wiring diagram (Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING), these outputs share one commonreturn. Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation.

Shielded cable should be used for connections, with only one end of the shield grounded, to minimize noiseeffects. The analog output circuitry is isolated. Transorbs limit this isolation to ±36 volts with respect to the 369safety ground.

If an analog voltage output is required, a burden resistor must be connected at the input of the SCADA or mea-suring device. See Figure 3–10: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION. Ignoring the input impedanceof the input, RLOAD = VFULL SCALE / IMAX. For 0-1 mA, for example, if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to1 mA, RLOAD = 5 / 0.001 = 5000 ohms. For 4-20 mA, this resistor would be RLOAD = 5 V / 0.020 = 250 ohms.

Figure 3–10: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION

3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY

The 369 display can be seperated and mounted remotely up to 15’ away from the main relay. No seperatesource of control power is required for the display module. A 15’ standard shielded network cable is used tomake the connection between the display module and the main relay. A recommended and tested cable isavailable from GE Multilin. The cable should be wired as far away as possible from high current or voltage car-rying cables or other sources of electrical noise.

In addition the display module must be grounded if mounted remotely. A ground screw is provided on the backof the display module to facilitate this. A 12AWG wire is recommended and should be connected to the sameground bus as the main relay unit.

The 369 relay will still function and protect the motor without the display connected.



3

3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS

The 369 provides four form C output relays. They have been labeled Trip, Aux 1, Aux 2 and Alarm. Each relayhas normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts and can switch up to 8 amps at either 250 VAC or30 VDC with a resistive load. The NO or NC state is determined by the ‘no power’ state of the relay outputs.

All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, out-put relay activation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state.

For example:

A fail-safe NO contact will close when the 369 is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will openwhen activated (tripped) or when the 369 loses control power.

A non-fail-safe NO contact will remain open when the 369 is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition)and will close only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO con-tacts closed) the NO contacts will open.

Thus, in order to cause a trip on loss of control power to the 369, the Trip relay should be programmed as fail-safe. See Figure 3–11: HOOKUP / FAIL & NON-FAILSAFE MODES, for typical wiring of contactors and break-ers for fail-safe and non-fail-safe operation.

Output relays will remain latched after activation if the fault condition persists or the protection element hasbeen programmed as latched. This means that once this relay has been activated it will remain in the activestate until the 369 is manually reset.

The Trip relay cannot be reset if a timed lockout is in effect. Lockout time will be adhered to regardless ofwhether control power is present or not.

The relay contacts may be reset if motor conditions allow, by pressing the RESET key, using the REMOTERESET switch or via communications. The Emergency Restart feature overrides all features to reset the 369.

NOTE: The rear of the 369 relay shows output relay contacts in their power down state.

WARNING

In locations where system voltage disturbances can cause voltage levels to dip below thecontrol power range listed in specifications, any relay contact programmed as fail-safemay change state. Therefore, in any application where the ‘process’ is more critical thanthe motor, it is recommended that the trip relay contacts be programmed as non-fail-safe.If, however, the motor is more critical than the ‘process’ then the trip contacts should beprogrammed as fail-safe.



3

Figure 3–11: HOOKUP / FAIL & NON-FAILSAFE MODES

3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS

Three independent two-wire RS485 ports are provided. If option (F), the fiber optic port, is installed and usedthe Comm 3, RS485 port, may not be used. The RS485 ports are isolated as a group.

Up to 32 369's (or other devices) can be daisy-chained together on a single serial communication channelwithout exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. Com-mercially available repeaters may also be used to increase the number of relays on a single channel to a max-imum of 254. Note that there may only be one master device per serial communication link.

Connections should be made using shielded twisted pair cables (typically 24AWG). Suitable cables shouldhave a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (e.g. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed4000 ft. Commercially available repeaters can be used to extend transmission distances.

Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surgeprotection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply withan opto-coupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling. The source computer/PLC/SCADA systemshould have similar transient protection devices installed, either internally or externally, to ensure maximumreliability.

CAUTION: To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it isimperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tiedtogether and grounded in one location only, at the master. Failure to do somay result in intermittent or failed communications.

ÿþýüûúùþø÷öõ



3

Correct polarity is also essential. 369's must be wired with all ‘+’ terminals connected together, and all ‘–’ termi-nals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected con-figurations. The last device at each end of the daisy chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm 1/4 wattresistor in series with a 1nF capacitor across the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals. Observing these guidelines will result ina reliable communication system that is immune to system transients.

Figure 3–12: RS485 WIRING


3 INSTALLATION 3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION

3

3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION 3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

The optional remote RTD module has been designed such that it can be mounted near the motor. This elimi-nates the need for multiple RTD cables to be run back from the motor which may be in a remote location to theswitchgear.

Although the module is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference it should be mountedaway from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.

The remote RTD module physical dimensions and mounting (drill diagram) are shown in Figure 3–13: RTDDIMENSIONS.

Mounting hardware (bolts and washers) and instructions are provided with the module.

Figure 3–13: RTD DIMENSIONS


3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 3–14: REMOTE RTD MODULE

Remote

RTD

Module

369

MOTOR MANAGEMENT

RELAY

g

g

840711A5.CDR

SCADA

FIBER

RxTx

GROUND

BUS

STATOR

WINDING 1

STATOR

WINDING 2

STATOR

WINDING 3

STATOR

WINDING 4

STATOR

WINDING 5

STATOR

WINDING 6

MOTOR

BEARING 1

MOTOR

BEARING 2

PUMP

BEARING 1

PUMP

BEARING 2

PUMP

CASE

AMBIENT

HI

90 - 300VDC

70 - 265V:50/60Hz

L

N

CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3

RS485 RS485 RS485FIBER

71 74 7773 76 7972 75 78

4

12

16

20

24

28

32

36

40

44

48

8

3

11

15

19

23

27

31

35

39

43

47

7

2

10

14

18

22

26

30

34

38

42

46

6

1

9

13

17

21

25

29

33

37

41

45

5

Com

ComCom

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

shld.

shld.shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

SHLD SHLD SHLD Tx Rx

RTD1

WIT

HR

TD

OP

TIO

N(R

)

RTD3

RTD4

RTD5

RTD6

RTD7

RTD8

RTD9

RTD10

RTD11

RTD12

RTD2

126

125

124

123FILTER GROUND

LINE +

NEUTRAL -

SAFTY GROUNDCO

NT

RO

L

PO

WE

R

WITH OPTION (F)


3 INSTALLATION 3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE INSTALLATION

3

Figure 3–15: REMOTE RTD MODULE REAR VIEW


3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION

Figure 3–16: PHASE CT INSTALLATION


3 INSTALLATION 3.5 CT INSTALLATION

3

3.5.2 5 Amp GROUND CT INSTALLATION

Figure 3–17: 5A GROUND CT INSTALLATION


3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION

a) 3” and 5” WINDOW

Figure 3–18: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 3" AND 5" WINDOW


3 INSTALLATION 3.5 CT INSTALLATION

3

b) 8” WINDOW

Figure 3–19: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION - 8" WINDOW


4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4

4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.1.1 FACEPLATE

Figure 4–1: 369 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY FACEPLATE

There are two possible ways to interface with the 369 Motor Management Relay. The user may access therelay locally through the keypad and display on the relay faceplate, or remotely through a PC that is linked tothe relay via RS232, RS485 or Fibre Optic link (optional).

4.1.2 DISPLAY

Figure 4–2: EXAMPLE 369 DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 40 character LCD display to make them visible under poor lighting conditionsand from various viewing angles. Messages are displayed in plain English and do not require the aid of aninstruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display willdefault to user defined status messages. Any trip, alarm, or start inhibit will automatically override the defaultmessages and appear on the display.

Contrast Adjustment and Lamp Test: Press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds to initiate lamp test. The contrast canalso be adjusted now as required. Use the [VALUE] up and down keys to adjust the contrast. Press the[ENTER] key to save the adjustment when completed.


4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

4.1.3 LED INDICATORS

Figure 4–3: 369 LED INDICATORS

There are ten LED indicators, as follows:

LED INDICATORS

• TRIP Trip relay has operated (energized)

• ALARM Alarm relay has operated (energized)

• AUX 1 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)

• AUX 2 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)

• SERVICE Relay in need of technical service.

• BSD Relay has detected a backspin condition on a stopped motor

• RRTD RRTD module communication indication

• METERING 369 has option M or B installed

• COM 1 Channel 1 RS485 communication indication

• COM 2 Channel 2 RS485 communication indication

4.1.4 RS232 PROGRAM PORT

Figure 4–4: RS232PROGRAM PORT

This port is intended for connection to a portable PC. Setpoint files may becreated at any location and downloaded through this port using the 369PCprogram. Local interrogation of Setpoints and Actual Values is also possi-ble. New firmware may be downloaded to the 369 flash memory throughthis port. Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require a hardwareEPROM change.

TRIP BSD

ALARM RRTD

AUX 1AUX 1 METERING

AUX 2AUX 2 COM 1COM 1

SERVICE COM 2COM 2


4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4

4.1.5 KEYPAD

[ACTUAL VALUES]: This key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Alter-nately, one can scroll through the pages by pressing the Actual Values key followed by using the Page Up /Page Down keys.

[PAGE]: The Page Up/ Page Down keys may be used to scroll through page headers for both Setpoints andActual Values.

[LINE]: Once the required page is found, the Line Up/ Line Down keys may be used to scroll through the sub-headings.

[VALUE]: The Value Up and Value Down keys are used to scroll through variables in the Setpoint programmingmode. It will increment and decrement numerical Setpoint values.

[RESET]: The reset key may be used to reset a trip or latched alarm, provided it has been activated by select-ing the local reset.

[ENTER] The key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the subgroups or store altered setpoint values.

[CLEAR] The key is also dual purpose. It may be used to exit the subgroups or to return an altered setpoint toits original value before it has been stored.

[HELP]: The help key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages; such as the Setpointrange, etc.

To enter setpoints, select the desired page header. Then press the [LINE UP] / [ LINE DOWN] keys to scrollthrough the page and find the desired subgroup. Once the desired subgroup is found, press the [VALUE UP] /[VALUE DOWN] keys to adjust the setpoints. Press the [ENTER] key to save the setpoint or the [CLEAR] keyto revert back to the old setpoint.

Figure 4–5: 369 KEYPAD

The 369 messages are organized into pages under the main headings,Setpoints and Actual Values. The [SETPOINTS] key is used to navigatethrough the page headers of the programmable parameters. The [ACTUALVALUES] key is used to navigate through the page headers of the mea-sured parameters.

Each page is broken down further into logical subgroups of messages. The[PAGE] up and down keys may be used to navigate through the subgroups.

[SETPOINTS]: This key may be used to navigate through the page head-ers of the programmable parameters. Alternately, one can press this keyfollowed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.

ACTUAL

VALUES

RESET CLEAR ENTER

SET

POINTSHELP

PAGE

PAGE

LINE

LINE

VALUE

VALUE

Keypad1.cdrP/O 840707B2.CDR


4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

4.1.6 SETPOINT ENTRY

In order to store any setpoints, terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) must be shorted. (A key switch may beused for security). There is also a Setpoint Passcode feature that may be enabled to restrict access to set-points. The passcode must be entered to allow the changing of setpoint values. A passcode of 0 effectivelyturns off the passcode feature and only the access jumper is required for changing setpoints.

If no key is pressed for 30 minutes, access to setpoint values will be restricted until the passcode is enteredagain. To prevent setpoint access before the 30 minutes expires, the unit may be turned off and back on, theaccess jumper may be removed, or the SETPOINT ACCESS: Permitted setpoint may be changed toRestricted. The passcode cannot be entered until terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) are shorted.

Setpoint changes take effect immediately, even when motor is running. It is not recommended, however, tochange setpoints while the motor is running as any mistake could cause a nuisance trip.

Refer to section SETPOINT ACCESS for a more detailed description of the setpoint access procedure.


4 USER INTERFACES 4.2 369PC INTERFACE

4

4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4.2.1 INTRODUCTION

This document provides all the necessary information to install and/or upgrade a previous installation of the369PC Program, upgrade the relay firmware, and write/edit setpoint files.

The following sections are included in this document:

• System requirements• 369PC program version for previous installation check• 369PC program installation/upgrade procedure• 369PC program system configuration• Relay firmware upgrade procedure• Creating/Editing/Upgrading/Downloading Setpoint Files• Printing Setpoints and Actual Values• Using Trending and Waveform Capture• Viewing Phasors and Event Record• Troubleshooting

4.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPGRADE

The following minimum requirements must be met for the 369PC Program to properly operate on a computer.

Processor: Minimum 486, Pentium recommended.Memory: Minimum 4 Mb, 16 Mb recommended.

Minimum 540 K of conventional memory.Hard Drive: 20 Mb free space required before installation of PC program.O/S: Minimum Windows 3.1 or Windows 3.11 for Workgroup,

Windows NT or Windows 95 (recommended).Windows 3.1 Users must ensure that SHARE.EXE is installed.

If a version of the 369PC Program is currently installed, note the path and directory name as this informationwill be needed when upgrading.

HOW TO CHECK IF A CURRENTLY INSTALLED VERSION OF 369PC PROGRAM NEEDS UPGRADING:

1. Run 369PC program.2. Select Help.3. Select About 369PC .4. Compare version number located here with one on installation disks.5. If number here is lower, program needs upgrading.

Figure 4–6: 369PC PROGRAM HELP


4.2 369PC INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

Figure 4–7: CHECKING PROGRAM VERSION

INSTALLING/UPGRADING THE 369PC PROGRAM :

Installation of the 369PC Program is Accomplished as follows:

1. Start the Windows program

2. Insert the GEw Multilin Products CD into the appropriate drive

3. Select Install PS Software

4. Select 369PC

5. Follow the onscreen instructions



4

4.2.3 CONFIGURATION

1. Connect the computer running the 369PC program to the relay viaone of the RS485 ports or directly via the RS232 faceplate port.

2. Select 369PC under the GEPM group.

Once the 369PC program starts to operate, it will not automatically com-municate with the relay unless that function is enabled (see startupmode below).

The LED status and display message shown will match actual relay stateif communications is established.

3. To setup communications, select Computer from the Communica-tion menu.

4. Set Slave Address to match that programmed into relay.5. Set Communication Port# to the computer port connected to the

relay.6. Set Baud Rate and Parity to match that programmed into relay.7. Set Control Type to type used.8. Set Startup Mode to the desired startup (communicate or file)9. Select ON to enable communications with new settings.



4

4.2.4 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE

1. To upgrade the relay firmware, connect a computer to the 369 via thefront RS232 port. Then run the 369PC program and establish com-munications with the relay.

2. Select Upgrade Firmware from the Communication menu.

3. Select Yes to proceed or No to abort.

• Remember, all previously programmed setpoints will be erased.

4. Locate the firmware file to load into the relay.

5. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to abort.

6. Select Yes to proceed, No to load a different file, or Cancel to abortthe process.

7. The program will automatically put the relay into upload mode andthen begin loading the file selected.

• When loading is complete, the relay will not be in service and willrequire programming.



4

8. To communicate with the relay via the RS485 ports, Slave Address,Baud Rate and Parity may have to be manually programmed.



4

4.2.5 CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE

1. To create a new Setpoint file, run the 369PC Program. It is not nec-essary to have a 369 Relay connected to the computer. The 369PCstatus bar will indicate that the program is in “Polling Relay” modeand “Not Communicating”.

2. Select Setpoints from the menu and choose the appropriate sectionof setpoints to program, e.g. System Setup / Output Relay Setup andenter the new setpoints. When you are finished programming apage, select OK and store the information to the computer’s scratch-pad memory (note: this action does store the information as a file ona disk).

3. Repeat step 2. until all the desired setpoints are programmed.

4. Select File, Save As to store this file to disk. Enter the location andfile name of the setpoint file with a file extension of ‘.369’ and selectOK.

• The file is now saved to disk. See section DOWNLOADING A SET-POINT FILE TO THE 369.



4

4.2.6 EDITING A SETPOINT FILE

1. To create a new Setpoint file, run the 369PC Program. It is not nec-essary to have a 369 Relay connected to the computer. The 369PCstatus bar will indicate that the program is in “Polling Relay” modeand “Not Communicating”.

2. If the 369PC program is communicating, select Communication,Computer from the menu, and select Communicate: Off and OK toturn off computer communications with the relay and place the PCprogram in “Editing File” mode.

3. Select Setpoints from the menu and choose the appropriate sectionof setpoints to program, e.g. System Setup / Output Relay Setup andenter the new setpoints. When you are finished programming apage, select OK and store the information to the computer’s scratch-pad memory (note: this action does store the information as a file ona disk).

4. Repeat step 3. until all the desired setpoints are programmed.

5. Select File, Save As to store this file to disk. Enter the location andfile name of the setpoint file with a file extension of ‘.369’.

• The file is now saved to disk. See section DOWNLOADING A SET-POINT FILE TO THE 369.



4

4.2.7 DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369

1. To download a preprogrammed setpoint file to the 369 Relay, run the369PC program and establish communications with the connectedrelay via the faceplate RS232 port or through the RS485 connector.

2. Select File, Open from the menu on the 369PC program.

3. Locate the setpoint file to be loaded into the relay, and select OK.

• When the file is completely loaded from disk, the PC program willbreak communications with the connected relay and change the Sta-tus bar to say “Editing File” , “Not Communicating”.

4. Select File, Send Setpoint To Relay, to download the setpoint file tothe connected relay.

• When the file is completely downloaded, the status bar will revertback to “Communicating”.

• The relay now contains all the setpoints as programmed in the set-point file.

NOTE: This message will appear when attempting to download a set-point file with a revision number that does not match the revision of therelay firmware. See section UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEWREVISION.



4

4.2.8 UPGRADING SETPOINT FILE TO NEW REVISION

It may be necessary to upgrade the revision code for a previously savedSetpoint file when the firmware of the 369 Relay is upgraded.

1. To upgrade the revision of a previously saved Setpoint file, run the369PC program and establish communications with the 369 throughthe front RS232 port or through the RS485 connector.

2. Select Actual, Product Information from the menu and record theMain Revision number of the relay’s firmware, e.g. 30D251A8.000,where 251 is the Main Revision identifier.

3. Select File, Open from the menu and enter the location and filename of the saved Setpoint File to be downloaded to the connectedrelay. When the file is open, the 369PC program will be in “File Edit-ing” mode and “Not Communicating”.

4. Select File, Properties from the menu and note the version code ofthe setpoint file. If the Main Revision code of the Setpoint File (e.g.23X) is different than the Main Revision code of the Firmware (asnoted in step 2, as 251), use the pull-down tab to expose the avail-able revision codes and select the one which matches the Firmware.

e.g.

• Firmware revision: 53BMAXXX.000

• current setpoint file revision: 23X

• change Setpoint file revision to 25X5. Select File, Save to save the Setpoint file to Disk.6. See section DOWNLOADING A SETPOINT FILE TO THE 369.



4

4.2.9 PRINTING

1. To print the Relay Setpoints , run the 369PC program; it is not nec-essary to establish communications with a connected 369.

2. Select File, Open to open a previously saved Setpoint File

or

3. Establish communications with a 369 connected to the computer toprint the current Setpoints.

4. Select File, Print Setup and highlight one of the Setpoints bubbles.Select OK.

5. Select File, Print and OK to send the Setpoint file to the connectedprinter.

1. To print the Relay Actual Values , run the 369PC program andestablish communications with a connected 369.

2. Select File, Page Setup and highlight the Actual Values bubble.

3. Under Print Setup, ensure that your specific printer is setup to PrintTrue Types as Graphics.

4. Select OK to close this window.

5. Select File, Print and OK to send the Setpoint file to the connectedprinter.



4

4.2.10 TRENDING

Trending from the 369 can be accomplished via the 369PC program. Many different parameters can betrended and graphed at sampling periods ranging from 1 second up to 1 hour.

The parameters which can be Trended by the 369PC program are:

Currents/VoltagesPhase Currents A,B,C Avg. Phase Current Motor Load Current UnbalanceGround Current Voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca Van, Vbn & Vcn

PowerPower Factor Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kvar) Apparent Power (kVA)Positive Watthours Positive Varhours Negative Varhours

TemperatureHottest Stator RTD RTDs 1 through 12 RRTDs 1 through 12

OtherThermal Capacity Used System Frequency

1. To use the Trending function, run the 369PC program and establishcommunications with a connected 369 relay.

2. Select Actual, Trending from the main menu to open the Trendingwindow.

3. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page.

4. Program the Graphs which are to be displayed by selecting the pulldown menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color,Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired.

5. Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together.

6. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close thiswindow.

7. Use the pulldown menu to select the Sample Rate, click the check-boxes of the Graphs to be displayed, and select RUN to begin thetrending sampling.

8. Print will copy the window to the system printer. More information fornavigating through Trending can be found under Help.



4

9. The Trending File Setup button can be used to write the graph datato a file in a standard spreadsheet format. Ensure that the WriteTrended Data to File box is checked, and that the Sample Rate is ata minimum of 5 seconds. Set the file capacity limit to the amount ofmemory available for trended data.

Figure 4–8: TRENDING VIEW



4

4.2.11 WAVEFORM CAPTURE

The 369PC program can be used to capture waveforms from the 369 Relay at the instant of a trip. Maximum of64 cycles can be captured and the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the set cycles. Maximum of16 waveforms can be buffered (stored) with the buffer/cycle turned off.

The waveforms captured are:

• Phase Currents A, B & C

• Ground Current

• Voltages AN, BN, CN if Wye connected or AB, BC, CA if open delta connected.

1. To use the Waveform Capture function, run the 369PC program andestablish communications with a connected 369 Relay.

2. Select Actual, Waveform Capture from the main menu to open theWaveform Capture Window.

• What will appear is the waveform of Phase A current of the last tripof the 369. The date and time of this trip is displayed on the top ofthe window. The RED vertical line indicates the trigger point of therelay.

3. Press the Setup button to enter the Graph Attribute page.

4. Program the Graphs which are to be displayed by selecting the pulldown menu beside each Graph Description. Change the Color,Style, Width, Group #, and Spline selection as desired.

Select the same Group # for all parameters to be scaled together.

5. Select Save to store these Graph Attributes, and OK to close thiswindow.

6. Click the checkboxes of the Graphs to be displayed,

7. The Save button can be used to store the current image on thescreen, and Open can be used to recall a saved image. Print willcopy the window to the system printer. More information for navigat-ing through Waveform Capture can be found under Help.



4

Figure 4–9: WAVEFORM CAPTURE VIEW



4

4.2.12 PHASORS

The 369PC program can be used to view the phasor diagram of three phase currents and voltages.

The phasors are for:

• Phase Voltages A, B & C

• Phase Currents A, B & C

1. To use the Phasor Metering function, run the 369PC program andestablish communications with a connected 369 Relay.

2. Select Actual, Metering Data from the main menu, then click on thePhasors tab on the Metering Data Window. The phasor diagram andthe values of voltage phasors, and current phasors are displayed.

3. Note: Longer arrows are the voltage phasors, shorter arrows are thecurrent phasors.Va and Ia are the references (i.e. zero degree phase).Lagging angle is clockwise.

4. More information for Phasors can be found under Help.



4

Figure 4–10: PHASOR DATA VIEW



4

4.2.13 EVENT RECORDING

The 369PC program can be used to view the 369 Event Recorder. The Event Recorder stores motor and sys-tem information each time an event occurs (i.e. motor trip). The Event Recorder stores up to 40 events, whereEVENT01 is the oldest event. EVENT01 is overwritten when the number of events exceeds 40..

1. To use the Event Recording function, run the 369PC program andestablish communications with a connected 369 Relay.

2. Select Actual, Event Recording from the main menu to open theEvent Recording Window. The Event Recording Window displaysthe list of events with the most current event displayed on top.

3. Press the View Data button to view the details of selected events.

The Event Record Selector at the top of the View Data Windowallows the user to scroll through different events.

4. Select Save to store the details of the selected events to a file.

5. Select Print to send the events to the system printer, and OK to closethe window.

6. More information for Event Recording can be found under Help.



4

Figure 4–11: EVENT RECORDER VIEW



4

4.2.14 TROUBLESHOOTING

This section provides some procedures for troubleshooting the 369PC when troubles are encountered withinthe WindowsTM Environment, e.g. General Protection Fault (GPF), Missing Window, Problems in Open-ing/Saving Files, and Application Error .

If the 369 program causes WindowsTM system errors:

• Make sure the PC computer program is installed and meets the minimum requirements.

• Make sure only one copy of the PC program is running at a given time - the PC program cannot multi-task.


5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU

S1 SETPOINTS369 SETUP

SETPOINT ACCESS

DISPLAY PREFERENCES

369 COMMUNICATIONS

REAL TIME CLOCK

WAVEFORM CAPTURE

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

DEFAULT MESSAGES

CLEAR\PRESET DATA

INSTALLED OPTIONSAND ACCESSORIES

S2 SETPOINTSSYSTEM SETUP

CT/VT SETUP

MONITORING SETUP

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

S3 SETPOINTSOVERLOAD PROTECTION

THERMAL MODEL

OVERLOAD CURVES

OVERLOAD ALARM


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETPOINTS

5

S4 SETPOINTSCURRENT ELEMENTS

SHORT CIRCUIT

MECHANICAL JAM

UNDERCURRENT

CURRENT UNBALANCE

GROUND FAULT

S5 SETPOINTSMOTOR START/INHIBITS

ACCELERATION TRIP

START INHIBIT

BACKSPIN DETECTION

S6 SETPOINTSRTD TEMPERATURE

LOCAL RTDPROTECTION

REMOTE RTDPROTECTION

OPEN RTD ALARM

SHORT/LOW TEMP RTDALARM

LOSS OF RRTDCOMMS ALARM


5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5

S7 SETPOINTSVOLTAGE ELEMENTS

UNDERVOLTAGE

OVERVOLTAGE

PHASE REVERSAL

UNDERFREQUENCY

OVERFREQUENCY

S8 SETPOINTSPOWER ELEMENTS

LEAD POWER FACTOR

LAG POWER FACTOR

POSITIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

NEGATIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

UNDERPOWER

REVERSE POWER

S9 SETPOINTSDIGITAL INPUTS

SPARE SWITCH

EMERGENCY RESTART

DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

SPEED SWITCH

REMOTE RESET

S10 SETPOINTSANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUT 1


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETPOINTS

5

ANALOG OUTPUT 2

ANALOG OUTPUT 3

ANALOG OUTPUT 4

S11 SETPOINTS369 TESTING

SIMULATION MODE

PRE-FAULT SETUP

FAULT SETUP

FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS


5 SETPOINTS 5.2 S1 369 SETUP

5

5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5.2.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 1 MENU

These setpoints deal with the non-protective setup and operation of the 369.

S1 SETPOINTS369 SETUP

SETPOINT ACCESS

DISPLAY PREFERENCES

369 COMMUNICATIONS

REAL TIME CLOCK

WAVEFORM CAPTURE

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

DEFAULT MESSAGES

CLEAR\PRESET DATA



5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.2.2 SETPOINT ACCESS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP SETPOINT ACCESS

There are three levels of access security in the: Read Only, Read/Write and Factory Service.

Read Only: Setpoints and Actual Values may be viewed but, not changed.

Read/Write: Permits viewing of Actual Values as well as changing and storing of Setpoints

Factory Service: For factory use only (enables a new Factory Service Menu)

Note: The access terminals (terminals 57 & 58) must be shorted to gain Read/Write access, regardlessof the RESTRICT WRITE ACCESS setting.

When a 369 is shipped from the factory, the access password is defaulted to 0. When the password is 0, theaccess level is Read/Write.

To restrict write access to the 369 enter Yes at the Restrict Write Access message. A non-zero password mustbe programmed if one has not been previously entered. The access level then becomes Read Only. The pass-word must then be entered via the keypad (faceplate) or one of the communication ports to gain Read/Writeaccess from that specific location.

In order to gain Read/Write access when the access level is Read Only: Enter the correct access password. Ifthe password is correctly entered, the access level will be changed from Read Only to Read/Write. If no keysare pressed for longer than 30 minutes or if control power is cycled, access will automatically revert to ReadOnly. In addition access through the front keypad is also restricted via the Access digital input. Even if theaccess password is 0 the access level will be Read Only (keypad only) unless the Access input is shorted.

To change access level security from Read Only back to Read/Write permanently: Enter the password asabove and then enter ‘Yes’ for Change Access Password. Enter the new password as 0. The access level willthen be Read/Write permanently. Note: Access digital input still affects keypad access.

If the access level is Read/Write, write access to setpoints is automatic and a 0 password need not be entered.

If the programmed password is not known, consult the factory service department with the encrypted accesspassword and they can decode it.

SETPOINT ACCESS FRONT PANEL ACCESS:Read & Write

Range: Read Only, Read & Write

COMM ACCESSRead & Write

Range: Read Only, Read & Write

ENCRYPTED COMMPASSCODE: AIKFBAIK

Range: 8 Alphabetic characters



5

5.2.3 DISPLAY PREFERENCES

PATH: S1 369 SETUP DISPLAY PREFERENCES

Some of the message characteristics can be modified to suit different situations preferences setpoints.

If no keys are pressed for a period of time longer than the default message timeout, then the 369 will automat-ically display a series of default messages. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on thescreen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. Each default message will remain on thescreen for the default message cycle time.

The contrast of the LCD display can be changed here to alter the display to suit all lighting conditions. If the dis-play is unreadable (dark or light) press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds. This will put the relay in manual contrastadjustment mode. Use the value up or down keys to adjust the contrast level. Press the [ENTER] key whencomplete.

The display update interval controls how often the display is updated. If the displayed readings are bouncing,the time may be increased to smooth out the readings.

Temperatures and RTD setpoints may be displayed and programmed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees.

DISPLAY PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGECYCLE TIME: 20 s

Range: 5-100 s in steps of 1

DEFAULT MESSAGETIMEOUT: 300 s


CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT:145

Range: 0-255Note: Display darkens as number is increased.

FLASH MESSAGEDURATION: 2s


TEMPERATURE DISPLAY:Celsius

Range: Celsius, FahrenheitShown if option R installed or RRTD added



5

5.2.4 369 COMMUNICATIONS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS

The 369 is equipped with four independent serial ports. The RS232 on the faceplate is intended for local useand will respond regardless of the slave address programmed. The rear RS485 communication ports areaddressed. Option F, a fiber optic port, may be ordered for channel 3. If the channel 3 fiber optic port is used,the channel 3 RS485 connection is disabled.

The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running the PC software. This may be used fordownloading and uploading setpoints files, viewing actual values, and upgrading the 369 to the latest revision.

RS485 communications support a subset of RTU protocol. Each must have a unique address from 1-254.Address 0 is the broadcast address which all relays listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential but notwo devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally each added to thelink will use the next higher address starting at 1. A maximum of 32 devices can be daisy chained and con-nected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. A repeater may be used to increase the number of relayson a single link to greater than 32.

369 COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS:254

Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

COMPUTER RS232BAUD RATE: 19200

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

COMPUTER RS232PARITY: None

Range: None, Odd, Even

CHANNEL 1 RS485BAUD RATE: 19200

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 1 RS485PARITY: None


CHANNEL 2: RS485BAUD RATE: 19200

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 2: RS485PARITY: None


CHANNEL 3CONNECTION: RS485

Range: RS485, Fiber

CHANNEL 3 RS485BAUD RATE: 19200

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 3 RS485PARITY: None




5

5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: S1 369 SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK

The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time are preset but, may beentered manually. A battery backed internal clock runs continuously even when power is off. It has the sameaccuracy as an electronic watch approximately +/- 1 minute per month. It may be periodically corrected eithermanually through the /keypad or via the clock update command over the serial link using the PC program.

Enter the current date using two digits for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the year. Forexample, July 15, 1999 would be entered as 07 15 1999. If entered from the keypad, the new date will takeeffect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed. Enter the current time, by using two digits for the hour in 24hour time, two digits for the minutes, and two digits for the seconds. If entered from the keypad, the new timewill take effect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed.

If the serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with each other. Anew clock time is pre-loaded into the memory map via the communications port by a remote computer to eachrelay connected on the communications channel. The computer broadcasts (address 0) a “set clock” commandto all relays. Then all relays in the system begin timing at the exact same instant. There can be up to 100ms ofdelay in receiving serial commands so the clock time in each relay is +/- 100ms, +/- absolute clock accuracy inthe PLC or PC. (See the Communications chapter for information on programming the time and synchronizingcommands.)

REAL TIME CLOCK SET MONTH:01


SET DAY:01


SET YEAR:1999


SET HOUR:00


SET MINUTE:00


SET SECOND:00




5


PATH: S1 PRODUCT SETUP WAVEFORM CAPTURE

Waveform capture records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as context information atthe point of trigger. These records are triggered by trip functions, digital input set to capture or via the PC pro-gram.

Multiple waveforms are captured simultaneously for each record Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, and Vc.

The number of records vs. the number of cycles of each record can be configured as per the following chart:

CAUTION: When number of records is altered, all waveform capture records will be cleared.

The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). The trig-ger position determines of the number of pre and post fault cycles the record will be divided into. The relaysampling rate is 16 samples per cycle.

WAVEFORM CAPTURE NUMBER OF RECORDS:4 X 16 Cycles

Range: 1 x 64, 2 x 32, 4 x 16, 8 x 8

TRIGGER POSITION:50 %

Range: 0 to 100%in Steps of 1

Number of RecordsLength of Record(cycles/channel)

8 8

4 16

2 32

1 64



5

5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

PATH: S1 369 SETUP MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

5 different 40 character message screens can be programmed. These messages may be notes that pertain tothe installation of the UNIT. This can be useful for reminding operators to perform certain tasks. The messagesmay be entered from the keypad or any of the communications ports.

1. To enter a 40 character message via the keypad:2. Select the user text message to be edited.3. Press the CLEAR button to enter text edit mode.4. Use the LINE up or down keys to move the cursor to the character location you wish to change.5. Use the VALUE key to scroll through and select the alphanumeric characters.6. Press the LINE up or down key to move the cursor to the next position.7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 and continue entering characters until the desired message is displayed.8. Press the ENTER key to store the message.

The PC program can also be used to enter these messages.

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD Text 1 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric

Text 2 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric






5

5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES

PATH: S1 369 SETUP DEFAULT MESSAGES

The 369 can display a series of default messages. These default messages will appear after the set value forthe Default Message Cycle Time expires and there are no active trips, alarms or start inhibits. See setpointspage 1, display properties section, for details on time delays and message durations.

The default messages can be selected from the list above including the five user definable messages from themessage scratchpad.

DEFAULT MESSAGES DEFAULT TO CURRENTMETERING: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO MOTORLOAD: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO DELTAVOLTAGE METERING: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO POWERFACTOR: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO POSITIVEWATTHOURS: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO REALPOWER: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO REACTIVEPOWER: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO HOTTESTSTATOR RTD: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO TEXTMESSAGE 1: No

Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No



5

5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA

PATH: S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESET DATA

These commands may be used to clear various historical data. This is useful on new installations or to presetinformation on existing installations where new equipment has been installed.

The PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER message will only be seen if one of the digital inputs has been configuredas a digital input counter.

CLEAR/PRESET DATA CLEAR ALL DATA:No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR LAST TRIPDATA: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR TRIPCOUNTERS: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR EVENTRECORD: No

Range: No, YesClears all 40 events

CLEAR RTDMAXIMUMS: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR PEAK DEMANDDATA: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR MOTORDATA: No

Range: No, Yes. Clears learned acceleration time,starting current, thermal capacity, and statistics.

PRESET MWh:0

Range: 0.000-999999.999 MWh in steps of0.001, can be preset or cleared by storing 0

PRESET Mvarh:0

Range: 0.000-999999.999 Mvarh in steps of0.001, can be preset or cleared by storing 0

PRESET DIGITALCOUNTER: 0

Range: 0-65535 in steps of 1Can be preset or cleared by storing 0



5

5.2.10 INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

PATH: S1 369 SETUP INSTALLED OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The 369 options listed in the order code can be ordered and installed in the field. To enable an option select theoption to be enabled and enter the passcode for that option for that relay.

NOTE: Passcodes are obtained from the factory. There will be a charge for each option dependentupon the option to be installed. Options F and P also have hardware cards associated withthem which can be installed in the field. To order an option call the factory with the serial num-ber of the unit to be upgraded and a P.O. number. A passcode will then be issued for theoptions desired and hardware shipped if required.

The RRTD module uses either Com3 or the fiber optic output. By enabling the RRTD module, these ports can-not be used for other communication purposes.


ENABLE RTD:No

Range: No = Option not enabled.Yes = Optional 12 RTD inputs enabled.

ENABLE METERING ORBACKSPIN: No

Range: No = Option not enabled.Options: Metering or Backspin enabled.

ENABLE FIBER OPTICPORT: No

Range: No = Option not enabled.Yes = Fiber Optic Port enabled.

ENABLE PROFIBUSINTERFACE: No

Range: No = Option not enabled.Yes = Optional Profibus Protocol enabled.

ENTER PASSCODE:0

Range: 0-999999999 in steps of 1

ENABLE RRTD MODULE:No

Range: No, Yes


5 SETPOINTS 5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP

5

5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 2 MENU

These setpoints are critical to the operation of the 369 protective and metering features and elements. Mostprotective elements are based on the information input for the CT/VT SETUP and OUTPUT RELAY SETUP.Additional monitoring alarms and control functions of the relay are also set here.

S2 SETPOINTSSYSTEM SETUP

CT/VT SETUP

MONITORING SETUP

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

CONTROL FUNCTIONS


5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP

Phase CT:

Enter the phase CT primary here. The phase CT secondary (1A or 5A) is determined by terminal connection tothe 369. The phase CT should be chosen such that the motor FLA is between 50% and 100% of the phase CTprimary. Ideally the motor’s FLA should be as close to 100% of phase CT primary as possible, never more. Thephase CT class or type should also be chosen such that the CT can handle the maximum potential fault currentwith the attached burden without having its output saturate. Information on how to determine this if required isavailable in the application section of the 369 manual.

The motor FLA (full load amps or full load current) must be entered. This value may be taken from the motornameplate or motor data sheets.

Ground CT:

The ground CT type and primary (if 5A or 1A secondary) must be entered here. For high resistance groundedsystems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly or low resistance groundedsystems where fault current can be quite high, a 1A or 5A CT should be used for either zero sequence (corebalance) or residual ground sensing. If a residual connection is used with the phase CTs, the phase CT primarymust also be entered for the ground CT primary. As with the phase CTs the type of ground CT should be cho-sen to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.

Phase VT:

All voltage related setpoints are visible only if the 369 has metering installed.

CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY:500


MOTOR FLA:10


GROUND CT TYPE:5

Range: None, 5A secondary, 1A secondary,50:0.025

GROUND CT PRIMARY:100:5

Range: 1-5000 in steps of 1 Only shown for5A and 1A secondary CT

VT CONNECTION TYPE:None

Range: None, Open Delta, WyeOnly shown if option M installed

VT RATIO:35:1

Range: 1.00:1 to 240.00:1Only shown if option M installed

MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE:4160

Range: 100-20000 in steps of 1. Only shownif option M installed

ENABLE SINGLE VTOPERATION: Off

Range: AB, CB, AN, BN, CN, OffOnly shown if option M installed

NOMINAL FREQUENCY:60 Hz

Range: 50, 60, Variable

SYSTEM PHASESEQUENCE: ABC

Range: ABC, ACBOnly shown if option M installed



5

The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here or none if VTs are notused. If a single VT is to be used its connection must also be entered. Note that for single VT operation thephase reversal feature is disabled as all voltages are assumed to be balanced.

The VT turns ratio must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 40 and 240V whenthe primary is at motor nameplate voltage. All voltage protection features are programmed as a percent ofmotor nameplate or rated voltage which represents the rated motor design voltage line to line.

Example: Motor nameplate voltage is 4160V

VTs are 4160/120 open delta

Program: VT Connection Type: Open Delta

VT Ratio: 34.67:1

Motor Rated Voltage: 4160

System:

Enter the nominal system frequency here. This setpoint allows the 369 to determine the internal sampling ratefor maximum accuracy. The 369 may be used on variable speed drives if the frequency is entered as variable.Voltage and power elements will work properly as long as the voltage waveform is approximately sinusoidal.

Frequency is normally determined from the Va voltage input. If however this voltage drops below the minimumvoltage threshold the Ia current input will be used.

If the phase sequence for a given system is ACB rather than the standard ABC the phase sequence may bechanged. This setpoint allows the 369 to properly calculate phase reversal and power quantities and is onlyvisible if the 369 has metering installed.



5

5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP

MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTER

TRIP COUNTERALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ASSIGN ALARMRELAYS: Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, orcombinations of them

ALARM PICKUP LEVEL:25 Trips

Range: 1 - 50000 in steps of 1

TRIP COUNTER ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

STARTER FAILURE

STARTER FAILERALARM: Off


STARTER TYPE:Breaker

Range: Breaker, Contactor



STARTER FAILUREDELAY:100 ms

Range: 10 - 1000 ms in steps of 10

STARTER FAILUREALARM EVENTS:

Range: ON, OFF

CURRENT DEMAND

CURRENT DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min

Range: 5 - 90 min in steps of 1

CURRENT DEMANDALARM: Off




CURRENT DEMANDALARM LEVEL: 100 A

Range: 10 - 65535 A in steps of 1

CURRENT DEMANDALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kW DEMAND

kW DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min




5

TRIP COUNTER:

When the Trip Counter is enabled and the alarm pickup level is reached, an alarm will occur. To reset the alarmthe trip counter must be cleared (see S1 Clear/Preset Data) or the pickup level increased and the reset keypressed (if a latched alarm).

The trip counter alarm can be used to monitor and alarm when a predefined number of trips occur. This wouldthen prompt the operator or supervisor to investigate the causes of the trips that have occurred. Details of indi-vidual trip counters can be found in A4, Statistical Data.

kW DEMANDALARM: Off




kW DEMAND ALARMLEVEL: 100 kW

Range: 1 - 50000 kW in steps of 1

kW DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kvar DEMAND

kvar DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min


kvar DEMANDALARM: Off




kvar DEMAND ALARMLEVEL: 100 kvar

Range: -32000 to +32000 in steps of 1

kvar DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kVA DEMAND

kVA DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min


kVA DEMANDALARM: Off




kVA DEMAND ALARMLEVEL: 100 kVA


kVA DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off



5

STARTER FAILURE:

If the Starter Failure alarm feature is enabled, any time the 369 initiates a trip, the 369 will monitor the StarterStatus input (if assigned to Spare Switch in S9, Digital Inputs) and the motor current. If the starter status con-tacts do not change state or motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, an alarm willoccur. The time delay should be slightly longer than the breaker or contactor operating time. In the event thatan alarm does occur, if Breaker was chosen as the starter type, the alarm will be Breaker Failure. If on theother hand, Contactor was chosen for starter type, the alarm will be Welded Contactor.

DEMAND:

The 369 can measure the demand of the motor for several parameters (current, kW, kvar, kVA). The demandvalues of motors may be of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered orscheduled to reduce overall demand on a feeder. An alarm will occur if the limit of any of the enabled demandelements is reached.

Demand is calculated in the following manner. Every minute, an average magnitude is calculated for current,+kW, +kvar, and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds. These values are stored in a FIFO (First In,First Out buffer).The size of the buffer is dictated by the period that is selected for the setpoint. The averagevalue of the buffer contents is calculated and stored as the new demand value every minute. Demand for realand reactive power is only positive quantities (+kW and +kvar).

where: N= programmed Demand Period in minutes, n= time in minutesDEMANDN

Averagenn

N

==

∑1

1

ROLLING DEMAND (15 min. window)

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

t=0 t+10 t+20 t+30 t+40 t+50 t+60 t+70 t+80 t+90 t+100

TIME



5

5.3.4 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

RESET:

A latched relay (caused by a protective elements alarm or trip) may be reset at any time, providing that thecondition that caused the relay operation is no longer present. Unlatched elements will automatically resetwhen the condition that caused them has cleared. Reset location is defined in the following table.

OPERATION:

These setpoints allow the choice of relay output operation to fail-safe or non-failsafe. Relay latchcode however,is defined individually for each protective element.

Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized in its normal state and de-energized when activatedby a protection element. A failsafe relay will also change state (if not already activated by a protection element)when control power is removed from the 369. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change state when control power is removed from the 369 (if not already activatedby a protection element).

The choice of failsafe or non-failsafe operation is usually determined by the motor’s application. In situationswhere the process is more critical than the motor, non-failsafe operation is typically programmed. In situationswhere the motor is more critical than the process, failsafe operation is programmed.

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP OUTPUT RELAY RESETMODE: All Resets

Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only

TRIP RELAYOPERATION: FS

Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

AUX1 RELAYOPERATION: NFS


AUX2 RELAYOPERATION: NFS


ALARM RELAYOPERATION: NFS

Range: FS (failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

RESET MODE RESET PERFORMED VIA

All Resets keypad, digital input, communications

Remote Only digital input, communications

Local Only keypad



5

5.3.5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS

SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL:

If enabled the motor may be remotely started and stopped via Modbus® communications to the 369. Refer tothe communication section for details on how to send commands (Function code 5). When a Stop command issent the Trip relay will activate for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for a breaker application or break thecoil circuit for a contactor application. When a Start command is issued the relay assigned for starting controlwill activate for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the coil circuitfor a contactor application.

CONTROL FUNCTIONS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONCONTROL

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONCONTROL: Off

Range: On, Off

ASSIGN STARTCONTROL RELAYS: Aux1

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 orcombinations of them


5 SETPOINTS 5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5

5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 3 MENU

One of the principle enemies of motor life is heat. When a motor is specified, the purchaser communicates tothe manufacturer what the loading conditions, duty cycle, environment and pertinent information about thedriven load such as starting torque. The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor thatshould have a reasonable life under those conditions. The purchaser should request all safe stall, accelerationand running thermal limits for all motors they receive in order to effectively program the 369.

Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of both the stator and the rotor. Motors have three modes ofoperation: locked rotor or stall (when the rotor is not turning), acceleration (when the rotor is coming up tospeed), and running (when the rotor turns at near synchronous speed). Heating occurs in the motor duringeach of these conditions in very distinct ways. Typically, during motor starting, locked rotor and accelerationconditions, the motor is rotor limited. That is to say that the rotor will approach its thermal limit before the stator.Under locked rotor conditions, voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency, 50 or 60 Hz. This voltagecauses a current to flow in the rotor, also at line frequency, and the heat generated (I2R) is a function of theeffective rotor resistance. At 50 or 60 Hz, the reactance of the rotor cage causes the current to flow at the outeredges of the rotor bars. The effective resistance of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotorcondition as is rotor heating. When the motor is running at rated speed, the voltage induced in the rotor is at alow frequency (approx. 1 Hz) and therefore, the effective resistance of the rotor is reduced quite dramatically.During running overloads, the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by stator parameters. Some specialmotors might be all stator or all rotor limited. During acceleration, the dynamic nature of the motor slip dictatesthat rotor impedance is also dynamic, and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary.

Figure 5–1: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96), illustrates typi-cal thermal limit curves. The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load @ 80% voltage. If themotor started quicker, the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the run-ning overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve.

Figure 5–1: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96)

S3 SETPOINTSOVERLOAD PROTECTION

THERMAL MODEL

OVERLOAD CURVES

OVERLOAD ALARM


5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL

The primary protective function of the 369 is the thermal model. It consists of five key elements: the overloadcurve and pickup level, unbalance biasing, motor cooling time constants, and temperature biasing based onHot/Cold motor information and measured stator RTD temperature.

The 369 integrates both stator and rotor heating into one model. Motor heating is reflected in a register calledThermal Capacity Used. If the motor has been stopped for a long period of time, it will be at ambient tempera-ture and thermal capacity used should be zero. If the motor is in overload, once the thermal capacity usedreaches 100%, a trip will occur. When a motor’s thermal limit is exceeded the insulation does not immediatelymelt. Rather the rate of insulation degradation has reached a point where the motor life will be significantlyreduced if the condition persists. The thermal capacity used alarm may be used as a warning indication of animpending overload trip.

THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD PICKUPLEVEL: 1.01 x FLA

Range: 1.01-1.25 in steps of 0.01

THERMAL CAPACITYALARM: Off


ASSIGN TC ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


TC ALARM LEVEL:75 % Used

Range: 1-100% in steps of 1

THERMAL CAPACITYALARM EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

ASSIGN TC TRIPRELAYS: Trip

Range: None,Trip,Aux1, Aux2 or combinationof them (TC trip is always on and latched)

ENABLE UNBALANCEBIAS OF TC: No

Range: No, Yes

UNBALANCE BIASK FACTOR: Learned

Range: Learned , 1-29 in steps of 1Only shown if Unbalance Bias is enabled

HOT/COLD SAFE STALLRATIO: 1


ENABLE LEARNED COOLTIME: No

Range: No, Yes

RUNNING COOL TIMECONSTANT: 15 min.

Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled

STOPPED COOL TIMECONSTANT: 30 min.

Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled

ENABLE RTD BIASING:No

Range: No, Yes

RTD BIAS MINIMUM:40 °C

Range: 1to RTD BIAS MID POINTOnly shown if RTD biasing is enabled

RTD BIAS MID POINT:120 °C

Range: RTD BIAS MINIMUM to MAXIMUMOnly shown if RTD biasing is enabled

RTD BIAS MAXIMUM:155 °C

Range: RTD BIAS MID POINT to 200Only shown if RTD biasing is enabled



5

5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES

OVERLOAD CURVE SELECT CURVE STYLE:Standard

Range: Standard, Custom

STANDARD OVERLOADCURVE NUMBER: 4

Range: 1-15 in steps of 1Only seen if curve style is selected as Standard

TIME TO TRIP AT1.01xFLA: 17415s

Range: 0 - 32767s in steps of 1Only seen if curve style is Custom

TIME TO TRIP AT1.05xFLA: 3415 s

Range: 0 - 32767 s in steps of 1Only seen if curve style is Custom































5

The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall, acceleration, and running in both the stator and therotor. The Overload Pickup setpoint dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters anoverload condition. This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined. The curveis effectively cut off at current values below this pickup.

Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation, locked rotor orstall, acceleration, and running overload. Each of these curves may be provided for both a hot motor and a coldmotor. A hot motor is defined as one that has been running for a period of time at full load such that the statorand rotor temperatures have settled at their rated temperature. A cold motor is defined as a motor that hasbeen stopped for a period of time such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient tempera-ture. For most motors, the distinct characteristics of the motor thermal limits are formed into one smooth homo-geneous curve. Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided. This is acceptable if the motor has beendesigned conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on the thermal limit. In thiscase, the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised. If a motor has beendesigned very close to its thermal limits when operated as required, then the distinct characteristics of the ther-mal limits become important.





















TIME TO TRIP AT8.00xFLA: 6 S










5

The 369 overload curve can take one of two formats, Standard or Custom Curve. Regardless of which curvestyle is selected, the 369 will retain thermal memory in the form of a register called Thermal Capacity Used.This register is updated every 100ms using the following equation:

where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve @ Ieq as a function of FLA

The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the man-ufacturer. This will ensure that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached.

If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the 369 Standard Over-load Curve be used. The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shapebased on typical motor thermal limit curves (see Figure 5–2:, 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES, onpage 28 and Table 5–2:, 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES, on page 28).

TCusedtTCusedt 100ms–

100mstime_to_trip----------------------------- 100× %+=



5

Figure 5–2: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

x1

x15

100000

10000

1000

100

10

1.00

0.10 1.00

MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS

TIM

EIN

SE

CO

ND

S

10 100 1000

840719A1.CDR



5

Table 5–1: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

NOTE: Above 8.0 x Pickup, the trip time for 8.0 is used. This prevents the overload curve from actingas an instantaneous element

Standard Overload Curves Equation:

PICKUPLEVEL(x FLA)

STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS

x 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 x 15

1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304

1.05 853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806

1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2

1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9

1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1

1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0

1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9

1.75 42.41 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 392.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22

2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37

2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96

2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90

2.75 13.33 26.65 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91

3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.52 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98

3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18

3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60

3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42

4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45

4.25 5.12 10.25 15.37 20.50 25.62 30.75 35.87 41.00 46.12 51.25 56.37 61.50 66.62 71.75 76.87

4.50 4.54 9.08 13.63 18.17 22.71 27.25 31.80 36.34 40.88 45.42 49.97 54.51 59.05 63.59 68.14

4.75 4.06 8.11 12.17 16.22 20.28 24.33 28.39 32.44 36.50 40.55 44.61 48.66 52.72 56.77 60.83

5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65

5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84

6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47

6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.55 29.67 31.79

7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.21 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32

7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74

8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

Time_ To_ TripCurve_Multiplier 2.2116623

0.025303373 (Pickup 1) 0.050547581 (Pickup 1)2= ×× − + × −



5

CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE

If the motor starting current does begin to infringe on the thermal damage curves, it may become necessary touse a custom curve to tailor the protection to the motor so that successful starting may be possible withoutcompromising motor protection. Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting thermal damage curve (lockedrotor and acceleration) and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly. In thisinstance, it may become necessary to use a custom curve to tailor the motor protection to the motor thermallimits such that the motor may be started successfully and the motor may be utilized to its full potential withoutcompromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limit curves now become more critical. For theseconditions, it is recommended that the 369 custom curve thermal model be used. The custom overload curveof the 369 allows the user to program his own curve by entering trip times for 30 pre-determined current levels.The 369 will smooth the areas between these points to make the protection curve.

It can be seen in Figure 5-3 that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve withthe locked rotor overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.

Figure 5–3: CUSTOM CURVE EXAMPLE

Note: During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chanceof nuisance tripping during motor starts.



5

5.4.4 UNBALANCE BIAS

Unbalanced phase currents cause additional rotor heating that will not be accounted for by electromechanicalrelays and may not be accounted for in some electronic protective relays. When the motor is running, the rotorwill rotate in the direction of the positive sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative sequence cur-rent, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive sequence current, and hence, opposite to therotor rotation, will generate a rotor voltage that will produce a substantial rotor current. This induced current willhave a frequency that is approximately 2times the line frequency, 100 Hz for a 50Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system.Skin effect in the rotor bars at this fre-quency will cause a significant increasein rotor resistance and therefore, a sig-nificant increase in rotor heating. Thisextra heating is not accounted for in thethermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence currentsonly that come from a perfectly balanced supply and motor design.

The 369 measures the percentage unbalance for the phase currents. The thermal model may be biased toreflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current, present during an unbalance whenthe motor is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent motor heating current that takes intoaccount the unbalanced current effect along with the average phase current. This equivalent current is calcu-lated using the equation shown below.

Figure 5-4 shows recommended motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by theAmerican organization NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). Assuming a typical inductionmotor with an inrush of 6 x FLA and a negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of1,2,3,4,5% equals current unbalances of 6,12,18,24,30% respectively. Based on this assumption, Figure 5-5illustrates the amount of motor derating for different values of k entered for the setpoint Unbalance Bias k Fac-tor. Note that the curve created when k=8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve.

Ieq = Equivalent unbalance biased heating current

Iavg = Average RMS phase current measured

UB% = Unbalance percentage measured (100%=1, 50%=0.5 etc...)

k = Unbalance bias k factor

Figure 5–4: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTORDUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE (NEMA)

Figure 5–5: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTORDUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE (MULTILIN)

IeqIavg 1 k UB%( )2

+

FLA-----------------------------------------------=

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

0 1 2 3 4 5

PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

DE

RA

TIN

GF

AC

TO

R

k=2

k=4

k=6

k=8

k=100.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

0 1 2 3 4 5

PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

DE

RA

TIN

GF

AC

TO

R

factorkbiasUnbalance

etc...)0.5=50%1,=(100%measuredpercentageUnbalance=%

measuredcurrentphaseRMSAverage=

currentheatingbiasedunbalanceEquivalent=

=k

UB

Iavg

Ieq



5

If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against themeasured per unit motor current. ‘k’ may be calculated as:

(typical estimate)

(conservative estimate)

Where ILR is the per unit locked rotor current (ILR/FLA).

The 369 also has the ability to learn the unbalance bias k factor. It is recommended that the learned k factor notbe enabled until the motor has had at least five successful starts. The calculation of the learned k factor is asfollows:

Where:

ILSC = Learned starting current

FLA = Full load amps setpoint

k 175

I2LR

---------=

k 230

I2LR

---------=

k 175ILSC

FLA-----------

2

-------------------=



5

5.4.5 MOTOR COOLING

The thermal capacity used quantity is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor is stopped or currentis below the overload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time con-stants should be entered for both the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool signifi-cantly slower than a running motor. Note that the cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100%thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used.

The 369 has the ability to learn and estimate the stopped and running cool time constants for a motor. Calcula-tion of a cool time constant is performed whenever the motor state transitions from starting to running or fromrunning to stopped. The learned cool times are based on the cooling rate of the hottest stator RTD, the hot/coldratio, the ambient temperature (40 if no ambient RTD), the measured motor load and the programmed servicefactor or overload pickup. Learned values should only be enabled for motors that have been started, stoppedand run at least five times.

It should be noted that any learned cool time constants are mainly based on stator RTD information. Cool time,for starting, is typically a rotor limit. The use of stator RTDs can only render an approximation. The learned val-ues should only be used if the real values are not available from the motor manufacturer.

Motor cooling is calculated using the following formulas:

where:TCused = thermal capacity usedTCused_start = TC used value caused by overload conditionTCused_end = TC used value dictated by the hot/cold curve ratio when the motor is running, '0' when the motor is

stopped.t = time in minutesτ = Cool Time Constant (running or stopped)Ieq = equivalent motor heating currentoverload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLAhot/cold = hot/cold curve ratio

TCused TCused_start TCused_end–( ) e

1τ---

TCused_end+⋅=

TCused_end Ieq 1 hotcold-----------–

100%×⋅=



5

Figure 5–6: THERMAL MODEL COOLING 80%LOAD

Figure 5–7: THERMAL MODEL COOLING 100%LOAD

Figure 5–8: THERMAL MODEL COOLING MOTORSTOPPED

Figure 5–9: THERMAL MODEL COOLING MOTORTRIPPED

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

The

rmal

Cap

acity

Use

d

Cool Time Constant= 15 minTCused_start= 85%Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

The

rmal

Cap

acity

Use

d Cool Time Constant= 15 minTCused_start= 85%Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

The

rmal

Cap

acity

Use

d Cool Time Constant= 30 minTCused_start= 85%Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%Motor Stopped after running Rated LoadTCused_end= 0%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

The

rmal

Cap

acity

Use

d

Cool Time Constant= 30 minTCused_start= 100%Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%Motor Stopped after Overload TripTCused_end= 0%



5

5.4.6 HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO

The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The 369 thermalmodel will adapt for these conditions if the Hot/Cold Curve Ratio is programmed. The value entered for this set-point dictates the level of thermal capacity used that the relay will settle at for levels of current that are belowthe Overload Pickup Level. When the motor is running at a level that is below the Overload Pickup Level, thethermal capacity used will rise or fall to a value based on the average phase current and the entered Hot/ColdCurve Ratio. Thermal capacity used will either rise at a fixed rate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by therunning cool time constant.

Where:TCused_end = Thermal Capacity Used if Iper_unit remains steady stateIeq = equivalent motor heating currentHot/Cold = Hot/Cold Curve Ratio Setpoint

The hot/cold curve ratio may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safestall times. Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. If hot and cold times are not pro-vided, there can be no differentiation and the hot/cold curve ratio should be entered as 1.00.

TCused_end Ieq 1 hotcold-----------–

100%×⋅=



5

5.4.7 RTD BIAS

The 369 thermal replica created by the features described in the sections above operates as a complete andindependent model. The thermal overload curves however, are based solely on measured current, assuming anormal 40 ° C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambient temperature, or if motorcooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs, the 369 RTD biasfeature should be used to correct the thermal model.

The RTD bias feature is a two part curve, constructed using 3 points. If the maximum stator RTD temperatureis below the RTD Bias Minimum setpoint (typically 40° C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD tem-perature is above the RTD Bias Maximum setpoint (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher),then the thermal memory is fully biased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used. At values in between, thepresent thermal capacity used created by the overload curve and other elements of the thermal model, is com-pared to the RTD Bias thermal capacity used from the RTD Bias curve. If the RTD Bias thermal capacity usedvalue is higher, then that value is used from that point onward. The RTD Bias Center point should be set at therated running temperature of the motor. The 369 will automatically determine the thermal capacity used valuefor the center point using the Hot/Cold Safe stall ratio setpoint.

At < RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

At > RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

Where:

In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is real feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts ascorrection of the thermal model for unforeseen situations. Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond, RTDbiasing is good for correction and slow motor heating. The rest of the thermal model is required during startingand heavy overload conditions when motor heating is relatively fast.

It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias feature forces the ther-mal capacity used to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload tripoccurs. Presumably, the motor would trip on stator RTD temperature at that time.

RTD_Bias_TCUSED = TC used due to hottest stator RTD

TempACTUAL = Current temperature of hottest stator RTD

TempMIN = RTD Bias minimum setpoint (ambient temperature)

TempCENTER = RTD Bias center setpoint (motor running temperature)

TempMAX = RTD Bias max setpoint (winding insulation rating temperature)

TCUSED@RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint

TCused@RTD_Bias_Center 1 hotcold-----------–

100%×=

RTD_Bias_TCused

Tempactual Tempmin–

Tempcenter Tempmin–-------------------------------------------------------- TCused× @RTD_Bias_Center=

RTD_Bias_TCused

Tempactual Tempcenter–

Tempmax Tempcenter–-------------------------------------------------------------- 100 TCused@RTD_Bias_Center–( ) TC+

used× @RTD_Bias_Center=



5

Figure 5–10: RTD BIAS CURVE

5.4.8 OVERLOAD ALARM

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD ALARM

An overload alarm will occur only when the motor is running and the current rises above the programmed FLAof the motor. The overload alarm is disabled during a start.

An application of an unlatched overload alarm is to signal a PLC that controls the load on the motor, wheneverthe motor is too heavily loaded.

OVERLOAD ALARM OVERLOADALARM: Off


OVERLOAD ALARMLEVEL: 1.01 x FLA

Range: 1.01 - 1.50 in steps of 0.01

ASSIGN O/L ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


OVERLOAD ALARMDELAY: 1 s

Range: 0.1-60.0 s in steps of 0.1

OVERLOAD ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

-100 0 100 200 300

Maximum Stator RTD Temperature

The

rmal

Cap

acity

Use

d

RTD Bias Maximum

RTD Bias Center PointRTD Bias Minimum

Hot/ Cold = 0.85Rated Temperature=130 CInsulation Rating=155 C


5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 4 MENU

These elements deal with functions that are based on the current reading of the 369 from the external phaseand/or ground CTs. All models of the 369 include these features.

S4 SETPOINTSCURRENT ELEMENTS

SHORT CIRCUIT

MECHANICAL JAM

UNDERCURRENT

CURRENT UNBALANCE

GROUND FAULT


5 SETPOINTS 5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

5

5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT

Note: Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuitbreaker) is not rated to break the fault current, this feature should be disabled. Alternatively, thisfeature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream devicethat is capable of breaking the fault current.

FUNCTION:

Once the magnitude of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level × Phase CT Primary for a period oftime specified by the delay, a trip will occur. Note the delay is in addition to the 45 ms instantaneous operatetime.

There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. The backup delay should be greater than the short cir-cuit delay plus the breaker clearing time. If a short circuit trip occurs with the backup on, and the phase currentto the motor persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It isintended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breakertrip relay.

Various situations (e.g. charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors) may cause tran-sient inrush currents during motor starting that may exceed the Short Circuit Pickup level for a very shortperiod of time. The Short Circuit time delay is adjustable in 10 ms increments. The delay can be fine tuned toan application such that it still responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally,the Phase Short Circuit time delay will be set as quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nui-sance tripping occurs.

When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical com-ponent. This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS startingcurrent. If the short circuit level was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that therewould be nuisance trips during motor starting. As a rule of thumb the short circuit protection is typically set to atleast 1.6 times the symmetrical starting current value. This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping.

NOTE: Both the main Short Circuit delay and the backup delay start timing when the current exceeds the ShortCircuit Pickup level.

SHORT CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUITTRIP: Off


ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combina-tions of them

SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPLEVEL: 10.0 x CT


ADD S/C TRIPDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0 - 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s0 = Instantaneous

SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPBACKUP: Off


ASSIGN BACKUP RELAY:Aux1

Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsof them

ADD S/C BACKUP TRIPDELAY: 0.20 s

Range: 0 - 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s



5

5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS MECHANICAL JAM

FUNCTION:

After a motor start, once the magnitude of any one of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level × FLAfor a period of time specified by the Delay, a Trip will occur. This feature may be used to indicate a stall condi-tion when running. Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal model (over-load curve), it may also prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment that may occur if motor starting torquepersists on jammed or broken equipment.

The pickup level for the Mechanical Jam Trip should be set higher than motor loading during normal opera-tions, but lower than the motor stall level. Normally the delay would be set to the minimum time delay, or setsuch that no nuisance trips occur due to momentary load fluctuations.

MECHANICAL JAM MECHANICAL JAMALARM: Off


ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combina-tions of them

MECHANICAL JAM ALARMLEVEL: 1.50 x FLA

Range: 1.01 to 6.00 in steps of 0.01

MECHANICAL JAM ALARMDELAY: 1.0 s


MECHANICAL JAM ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

MECHANICAL JAMTRIP: Off



Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsof them

MECHANICAL JAM TRIPLEVEL: 1.50 x FLA


MECHANICAL JAMTRIP DELAY: 1.0 s




5

5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS UNDERCURRENT

FUNCTION:

If enabled, once the magnitude of either phase A, B or C falls below the pickup level × FLA for a period of timespecified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The undercurrent element is an indication of loss of load to themotor. Thus the pickup level should be set lower than motor loading levels during normal operations. Theundercurrent element is active when the motor is starting or running.

The undercurrent element can be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified bythe U/C Block From Start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before theundercurrent element trips). A value of 0 means undercurrent protection is immediately enabled upon motorstarting (no block). If a value other than 0 is entered, the feature will be disabled from the time a start isdetected until the time entered expires.

APPLICATION EXAMPLE:

If a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may cause the pump to overheat. Undercurrent protec-tion should thus be enabled. If the motor loading should never fall below 0.75 × FLA, even for short durations,the Undercurrent Trip pickup could be set to 0.70 and the Undercurrent Alarm to 0.75. If the pump is alwaysstarted loaded, the block from start feature should be disabled (programmed as 0).

Time delay is typically set as quick as possible, 1 s.

UNDERCURRENT BLOCK UNDERCURRENTFROM START: 0 s


UNDERCURRENTALARM: Off




UNDERCURRENT ALARMLEVEL: 0.70 x FLA


UNDERCURRENT ALARMDELAY: 1 s

Range: 1 - 255 s in steps of 1

UNDERCURRENT ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

UNDERCURRENTTRIP: Off




UNDERCURRENT TRIPLEVEL: 0.70 x FLA


UNDERCURRENT TRIPDELAY: 1 s




5

5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS CURRENT UNBALANCE

Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Causes ofunbalance can include: increased resistance in one phase due to a pitted or faulty contactor, loose connec-tions, unequal tap settings in a transformer, non-uniformly distributed three phase loads or varying singlephase loads within a plant. The most serious case of unbalance is single phasing which is the complete loss ofone phase. This can be caused by a utility supply problem or by a blown fuse in one phase and can seriouslydamage a three phase motor. A single phase trip will occur in 2 seconds if the Unbalance trip is on and thelevel exceeds 40%. A Single Phase trip will also activate if the Motor Load is above 30% and at least one of thephase currents is zero. Single phasing protection is disabled if the Unbalance Trip feature is turned Off.

During balanced conditions in the stator current in each motor phase is equal and the rotor current is just suffi-cient to provide the turning torque. When the stator currents are unbalanced, a much higher current is inducedinto the rotor due to its lower impedance to the negative sequence current component present. This current isat twice the power supply frequency and produces a torque in the opposite direction to the desired motor out-put. Usually the increase in stator current is small and timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip.However the much higher induced rotor current can cause extensive rotor damage in a short period of time.Motors can tolerate different levels of current unbalance depending on the rotor design and heat dissipationcharacteristics.

CURRENT UNBALANCE BLOCK UNBALANCE FROMSTART: 0 s


CURRENT UNBALANCEALARM: Off




UNBALANCE ALARMLEVEL: 15 %

Range: 4 - 30% in steps of 1

UNBALANCE ALARMDELAY: 1 s


UNBALANCE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

CURRENT UNBALANCETRIP: Off




UNBALANCE TRIPLEVEL: 20 %

Range: 4 - 30% in steps of 1

UNBALANCE TRIPDELAY: 1 s




5

To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damagethe rotor, the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30%of the full load current (IFLC) setting. Unbalance is calculated as:

Unbalance protection is recommended at all times. When setting the unbalance pickup level, it should benoted that a 1% voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. Therefore, in order to pre-vent nuisance trips or alarms, the pickup level should not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances arecommon, a reasonable delay should be set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. It is recommended that theunbalance thermal bias feature be used to bias the Thermal Model to account for rotor heating that may becaused by cyclic short term unbalances.

If IAVG ≥ IFLA If IAVG< IFLA

IAVG = average phase current,

IMAX = current in a phase with maximum deviation from IAVG,IFLA = motor full load amps setting

UnbalanceI I

Ix

MAX AVG

AVG= −

100 UnbalanceI I

Ix

MAX AVG

FLA= −

100



5

5.5.6 GROUND FAULT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS GROUND FAULT

FUNCTION:

Once the magnitude of ground current exceeds the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, atrip and/or alarm will occur. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. If the backup is On, and aGround Fault trip has initiated, and the ground current persists for a period of time that exceeds the backupdelay, a second ‘backup’ trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 whichwould be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay. The Ground Fault Trip Backup delay must be set to atime longer than the breaker clearing time.

Note: Care must be taken when turning On this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuitbreaker) is not rated to break ground fault current (low resistance or solidly grounded systems),

GROUND FAULT GROUND FAULTALARM: Off


ASSIGN G/F ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


GROUND FAULT ALARMLEVEL: 0.10 x CT

Range: 0.10-1.00 in steps of 0.01 for 1A/5AOnly shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A

GROUND FAULT ALARMLEVEL: 0.25 A

Range: 0.25-25.00A in steps of 0.01 for 50:0.025Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025

GROUND FAULT ALARMDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0.00 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s

GROUND FAULT ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

GROUND FAULTTRIP: Off




GROUND FAULT TRIPLEVEL: 0.20 x CT

Range: 0.10-1.00 in steps of 0.01 for 1A/5AOnly shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A

GROUND FAULT TRIPLEVEL: 0.25 A

Range: 0.25-25.00A in steps of 0.01 for 50:0.025Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025

GROUND FAULT TRIPDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s

GROUND FAULT TRIPBACKUP: Off


ASSIGN G/F BACKUPRELAYS: Aux2

Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations ofthem

G/F TRIP BACKUPDELAY: 0.20 s

Range: 0.01 - 255.00s in steps of 0.01s



5

the feature should be disabled. Alternately, the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay andconnected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current.

Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that mayexceed the Ground Fault Pickup levels for a very short period of time. The delay can be fine tuned to an appli-cation such that it still responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, theGround Fault time delays will be set as quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisancetripping occurs.

Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When amotor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component.This asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current.This momentary DC component will cause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current intothe ground input of the 369 will not be negligible. A 20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motorstarts enables the 369 to ride through this momentary ground current signal.

NOTE: Both the main Ground Fault delay and the backup delay start timing when the Ground Fault currentexceeds the pickup level.


5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS 5.6.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 5 MENU

These setpoints deal with those functions that prevent the motor from restarting once stopped until a set condi-tion clears and/or a set time expires. None of these functions will trip a motor that is already running.

S5 SETPOINTSMOTOR START/INHIBITS

ACCELERATION TRIP

START INHIBITS

BACKSPIN DETECTION Only shown if option B installed


5 SETPOINTS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS

5

5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS ACCELERATION TRIP

FUNCTION:

The 369 Thermal Model is designed to protect the motor under both starting and overload conditions. TheAcceleration Timer trip feature may be used in addition to that protection. If for example, the motor shouldalways start in 2 seconds, but the safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point letting the motor remain in astall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when the thermal model would take it off line. Furthermore, the starting torqueapplied to the driven equipment for that period of time could cause severe damage.

If enabled, the Acceleration Timer trip element will function as follows: A motor start is assumed to be occurringwhen the 369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. Typically current willrise quickly to a value in excess of FLA (e.g. 6 x FLA). At this point, the Acceleration Timer will be initializedwith the entered value in seconds. If the current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before thetimer expires, an acceleration trip will occur. If the acceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature shouldbe set just beyond the longest acceleration time.

Note: Some motor softstarters may allow current to ramp up slowly while others may limit current toless than Full Load Amps throughout the start. In these cases, as a generic relay that must pro-tect all motors, the 369 cannot differentiate between a motor that has a slow ramp up time andone that has completed a start and gone into an overload condition. Therefore, if the motor cur-rent does not rise to greater than full load within 1 second on start, the acceleration timer featureis ignored. In any case, the motor is still protected by the overload curve.

ACCELERATION TRIP ACCELERATIONTRIP: Off




ACCELERATION TIMEFROM START: 10.0 s




5

5.6.3 START INHIBITS

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS START INHIBITS

Function:Single Shot Restart: Enabling this feature will allow the motor to be restarted immediately after an overloadtrip has occurred. To accomplish this a reset will cause the 369 to decrease the accumulated thermal capacityto zero. However if a second overload trip occurs within one hour of the first another immediate restart will notbe permitted. The displayed lockout time must then be allowed to expire before the motor can be started.

Start Inhibit: The Start Inhibit feature is intended to help prevent tripping of the motor during start if there isinsufficient thermal capacity for a start. The average value of thermal capacity used from the last five success-ful starts is multiplied by 1.25 and stored as thermal capacity used on start. This 25% margin is used to ensurethat a motor start will be successful. If the number is greater than 100%, 100% is stored as thermal capacityused on start. A successful motor start is one in which phase current rises from 0 to greater than overloadpickup and then, after acceleration, falls below the overload curve pickup level. If the Start Inhibit feature isenabled, each time the motor is stopped, the amount of thermal capacity available (100% - Thermal CapacityUsed) is compared to the Thermal Capacity Used On Start. If the thermal capacity available does not exceedthe Thermal Capacity Used On Start, or is not equal to 100%, the Start Inhibit will become active until there issufficient thermal capacity. When a inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time required for themotor to cool to an acceptable temperature for a start. This time will be a function of the Cool Time ConstantStopped programmed. If this feature is turned Off, thermal capacity used must reduce to 15% before an over-load lockout resets. This feature should be turned off if the load varies for different starts.

Max Starts/Hour Permissible: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transi-tion of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the STARTS/HOUR timers isloaded with 60 minutes. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once themotor is stopped, the number of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If thetwo are the same, a inhibit will occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to one hour less thelongest time elapsed since a start within the past hour. An Emergency restart will clear the oldest start timeremaining.

Time Between Starts: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of nomotor current to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with theentered time. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor isstopped, if the time elapsed since the most recent start is less than the Time Between Starts setpoint, an inhibitwill occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start sub-tracted from the Time Between Starts setpoint.

START INHIBITS ENABLE SINGLE SHOTRESTART: No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLESTART INHIBIT: No

Range: No, Yes

MAX STARTS/HOURPERMISSIBLE: Off

Range: Off(0), 1-5 in steps of 1

TIME BETWEEN STARTSPERMISSIBLE: Off

Range: Off(0), 1-500 min in steps of 1

RESTART BLOCK:Off

Range: Off(0), 1-50000 s in steps of 1

ASSIGN BLOCK RELAYAUX2

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations


5 SETPOINTS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS

5

Restart Block: The Restart Block feature may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passesbetween stopping a motor and restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some processapplications or motor considerations. If a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid mayfall back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at thistime. In another scenario, a motor may be driving a very high inertia load. Once the supply to the motor is dis-connected, the rotor may continue to turn for a long period of time as it decelerates. The motor has nowbecome a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in catastrophic failure.

Assign Inhibit Relay: The relay(s) assigned here will be used for all blocking/inhibit elements in this section.The assigned relay will activate only when the motor is stopped. When a block/inhibit condition times out or iscleared the assigned relay will automatically reset itself.

Notes for all Inhibits and Blocks:

1. In the event of control power loss all lockout times will be saved. Elapsed time will be recorded and decre-mented from the inhibit times whether control power is applied or not. Upon control power being re-estab-lished to the 369 all remaining inhibits (have not time out) will be re-activated.

2. If the motor is started while an inhibit is active and event titled ‘Start while Blocked’ will be recorded.



5

5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS BACKSPIN DETECTION

Function:

Immediately after the motor is stopped, backspin detection commences and a backspin start inhibit is activatedto prevent the motor from being restarted. The BSD voltage inputs are monitored for voltage level and fre-quency. Frequency is measured as the motor decelerates and again as it accelerates and then decelerates inthe reverse direction. This measured frequency is compared to the Low Frequency Start Level and the numberof Samples Before Start Permissive. If the measured frequency is below the programmed start level for thenumber of samples programmed then the backspin start inhibit will be removed. If during any sample the Mini-mum Operating Voltage is not reached then the backspin start inhibit is removed. For this reason the BackspinInhibit Timer is used to guarantee a minimum time off if the BSD signal is lost.

Application:

Backspin protection is typically used on down hole pump motors which can be located several kilometersunderground. Check valves are often used to prevent flow reversal when the pump stops. Very often however,the flow reverses due to faulty or non existent check valves, causing the pump impeller to rotate the motor inthe reverse direction. Starting the motor during this period of reverse rotation (back-spinning) may result inmotor damage. Backspin detection ensures that the motor can only be started when the motor has slowed towithin acceptable limits. Without backspin detection a long time delay had to be used as a start permissive toensure the motor had slowed to a safe speed.

Note: These setpoints are only visible when option B has been installed.

BACKSPIN DETECTION ENABLE BACKSPINSTART INHIBIT: No

Range: No, Yes

LOW FREQUENCY STARTLEVEL: 2 Hz

Range: 2 - 30 Hz in steps of 0.01Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

ASSIGN BSD RELAY:Aux2

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsShown only if backspin is enabled

NUMBER OF MOTORPOLES: 2

Range: 2 - 16 in steps of 2Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

BACKSPIN DETECTIONSTATE:No_BSD_Running

Range: No_BSD_Running, Just_Stopped, Slow-down, Acceleration, BSD_Slowdown, Predic-tion, ExitShown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

BACKSPIN PREDICTIONTIMER:30 s

Range: 0 - 50000 s in steps of 1Shown only if backspin is enabled


5 SETPOINTS 5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE

5

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 6 MENU

These setpoints deal with the RTD overtemperature elements of the 369. The Local RTD Protection setpointswill only be seen if the 369 has option R installed. The Remote RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the369 has the RRTD accessory enabled. Both can be enabled and used at the same time and have the samefunctionality.

5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOCAL RTD PROTECTION

S6 SETPOINTSRTD TEMPERATURE

LOCAL RTDPROTECTION


OPEN RTD ALARM



LOCAL RTDPROTECTION

LOCAL RTD 1

RTD 1 APPLICATION:None

Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient,Other

RTD 1 TYPE:100 Ohm Platinum

Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel,120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 NAME:RTD 1

Range: 8 character alphanumeric;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 ALARM:Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 ALARM RELAYS:Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, orcombinations;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C

Range: 1-200°C in steps of 134-392°F in steps of 1;

only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 HI ALARM:Off


RTD 1 HI ALARMRELAYS: Aux1

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, orcombinations;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.


5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5 SETPOINTS

5

RTD 1 HI ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C



RECORD RTD 1 ALARMSAS EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 TRIP:Off


RTD 1 TRIP RELAYS:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or com-binations;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

RTD 1 TRIPLEVEL: 130 °C



ENABLE RTD 1 TRIPVOTING: Off

Range: Off, RTD 1-12, All Stator;only if RTD 1 Application is other than None.

LOCAL RTD 2

LOCAL RTD 12



5

5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE REMOTE RTD PROTECTION


REMOTE RTD 1

RRTD 1 APPLICATION:None

Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient,Other

RRTD 1 TYPE:100 Ohm Platinum

Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel,120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 NAME:RRTD1

Range: 8 character alphanumeric;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 ALARM:Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 ALARM RELAYS:Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, orcombinations;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C


only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 HI ALARM:Off


RRTD1 HI ALARMRELAY: Aux1

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, orcombinations;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 HI ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C



RECORD RRTD 1 ALARMSAS EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 TRIP:Off


RRTD 1 TRIP RELAYS:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or com-binations;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

RRTD 1 TRIPLEVEL: 130 °C



ENABLE RRTD 1 TRIPVOTING: Off

Range: Off, RRTD 1-12, All Stator;only if RRTD 1 Application is other than None

REMOTE RTD 2



5

REMOTE RTD 12



5

Local / Remote RTD Operation:

Application: Each individual RTD may be assigned an application. A setting of None effectively turns that indi-vidual RTD off. Only RTDs with the application set to Stator are used for RTD biasing of the thermal model. Ifan RTD’s application is set to Ambient this RTD temperature will be used in calculating the learned cool time ofthe motor.

Type: Each RTD is individually assigned the type of RTD that is connected to it. Multiple types may be usedwith a single 369.

Name: Each RTD may have up to an 8 character name assigned to it. This name will be used in alarm and tripmessages.

Alarm/Hi Alarm/Trip: Each RTD can be programmed for separate Alarm, Hi Alarm and Trip levels and relays.Trips are automatically stored as events. Alarms and Hi Alarms are stored as events only if the Record Alarmsas Events setpoint for that RTD is set to Yes.

Trip Voting: This feature has been included for added RTD trip reliability in situations where RTD malfunctionand nuisance tripping is common. If enabled that RTD will only trip if the RTD or RTDs listed to be voted withare also above their trip level. For example if RTD 1 is set to vote with All Stator RTDs, it will only trip if RTD 1is above its trip level and any one of the other stator RTDs is also above its own trip level. RTD voting is typi-cally only used on Stator RTDs and typically done between adjacent RTDs to detect hot spots.

Stator RTDs can detect heating due to non overload (current) conditions such as blocked or inadequate cool-ing and ventilation or high ambient temperature as well as heating due to overload conditions. Bearing or otherRTDs can detect overheating of bearings or auxiliary equipment.

Table 5–2: RTD RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE

TEMP°Celsius

TEMP°Fahrenheit

100 OHM Pt(DIN 43760)

120 OHM Ni 100 OHM Ni 10 OHM Cu

-40 -40 84.27 92.76 79.13 7.49-30 -22 88.22 99.41 84.15 7.88-20 -4 92.16 106.15 89.23 8.26-10 14 96.09 113.00 94.58 8.650 32 100.00 120.00 100.0 9.04

10 50 103.90 127.17 105.6 9.4220 68 107.79 134.52 111.2 9.8130 86 111.67 142.06 117.1 10.1940 104 115.54 149.79 123.0 10.5850 122 119.39 157.74 129.1 10.9760 140 123.24 165.90 135.3 11.3570 158 127.07 174.25 141.7 11.7480 176 130.89 182.84 148.3 12.1290 194 134.70 191.64 154.9 12.51

100 212 138.50 200.64 161.8 12.90110 230 142.29 209.85 168.8 13.28120 248 146.06 219.29 176.0 13.67130 266 149.82 228.96 183.3 14.06140 284 153.58 238.85 190.9 14.44150 302 157.32 248.95 198.7 14.83160 320 161.04 259.30 206.6 15.22170 338 164.76 269.91 214.8 15.61180 356 168.47 280.77 223.2 16.00190 374 172.46 291.96 231.6 16.39200 392 175.84 303.46 240.0 16.78



5

5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE OPEN RTD ALARM

FUNCTION:

The 369 has an Open RTD Sensor Alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have been assigned an applica-tion other than ‘None’ and determine if an RTD connection has been broken. When a broken sensor isdetected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTDthat is broken. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that inter-mittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.

5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM

FUNCTION:

The 369 has an RTD Short/Low Temperature alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have an applicationother than ‘None’ and determine if an RTD has either a short or a very low temperature (less than -40° C).When a short/low temperature is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appearon the display identifying the RTD that caused the alarm. It is recommended that if this feature is used, thealarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.

OPEN RTD ALARM OPEN RTDALARM: Off



Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combina-tions

OPEN RTD ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On


SHORT/LOW TEMP RTDALARM: Off




SHORT/LOW TEMP ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On



5

5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM

FUNCTION:

The 369, if connected to a RRTD module, will monitor communications between them. If for some reason com-munications is lost or interrupted the 369 can issue an alarm indicating the failure. This feature is useful toensure that the remote RTDs are continuously being monitored.


LOSS OF RRTD COMMSALARM: OFF




LOSS OF RRTD COMMSEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On


5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 7 MENU

These elements are only seen if the 369 has option M or B installed.

S7 SETPOINTSVOLTAGE ELEMENTS

UNDERVOLTAGE

OVERVOLTAGE

PHASE REVERSAL

UNDERFREQUENCY

OVERFREQUENCY


5 SETPOINTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5

5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERVOLTAGE

FUNCTION:

If the undervoltage alarm or trip feature is enabled, once the magnitude of either Va, Vb, or Vc falls below therunning pickup level while running or the starting pickup level while starting, for a period of time specified by thealarm or trip delay, a trip or alarm will occur. (Pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).

An undervoltage on a running motor with a constant load will result in increased current. The relay thermalmodel will typically pickup this condition and provide adequate protection. This setpoint may however, be usedin conjunction with the time delay to provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warn-ing by tripping.

The U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED setpoint may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when themotor is stopped. If ‘No’ is programmed the undervoltage element will be blocked from operating whenever themotor is stopped (no phase current and starter status indicates breaker or contactor open). If the load is highinertia, it may be desirable to ensure that the motor is tripped off line or prevented from starting in the event ofa total loss or decrease in line voltage. Programming ‘Yes’ for the block setpoint will ensure that the motor istripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re-energized.

APPLICATION:

An undervoltage of significant proportions that persists while starting a synchronous motor may prevent themotor from coming up to rated speed within the rated time. An undervoltage may be an indication of a systemfault. To protect a synchronous motor from being restarted while out of step it may be necessary to use under-voltage to take the motor offline before a reclose is attempted.

UNDERVOLTAGE U/V ACTIVE IF MOTORSTOPPED: No

Range: No, Yes

UNDERVOLTAGEALARM: Off



Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combina-tions

STARTING U/V ALARMPICKUP: 0.85xRATED


RUNNING U/V ALARMPICKUP: 0.85xRATED


UNDERVOLTAGE ALARMDELAY: 3.0 S


UNDERVOLTAGE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERVOLTAGETRIP: Off



Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations

STARTING U/V TRIPPICKUP: 0.80xRATED


RUNNING U/V TRIPPICKUP: 0.80xRATED


UNDERVOLTAGE TRIPDELAY: 1.0s

Range: 0.0 - 255.0 s in steps of 0.1



5

5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERVOLTAGE

FUNCTION:

If enabled, once the magnitude of either Va, Vb, or Vc rises above the Pickup Level for a period of time speci-fied by the Delay, a trip or alarm will occur. (Pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).

An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load will result in decreased current. However, iron and cop-per losses increase, causing an increase in motor temperature. The current overload relay will not pickup thiscondition and provide adequate protection. Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protectingthe motor in the event of a sustained overvoltage condition.

OVERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGEALARM: Off




OVERVOLTAGE ALARMPICKUP: 1.05xRATED


OVERVOLTAGE ALARMDELAY: 3.0s


OVERVOLTAGE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

OVERVOLTAGETRIP: Off




OVERVOLTAGE TRIPPICKUP: 1.10xRATED


OVERVOLTAGE TRIPDELAY: 1.0s




5

5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE REVERSAL

FUNCTION:

The 369 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage. If the phase reversal feature is turned onwhen all 3 phase voltages are greater than 50% motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the threephase voltages is not the same as the setpoint, a trip and block start will occur in 500ms to 700ms.

NOTE: This feature does not work when single VT operation is enabled.

PHASE REVERSAL PHASE REVERSALTRIP: Off






5

5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERFREQUENCY

FUNCTION:

Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) falls below theunderfrequency pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.

APPLICATION:

This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shedan entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. Underfrequency can also be used to detectloss of power to a synchronous motor. The voltage may remain long enough (due to motor generation) that toquickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated voltage as the motor slowscan be used.

The Underfrequency element is only active when the motor is running.

UNDERFREQUENCY BLOCK UNDERFREQUENCYFROM START:


UNDERFREQUENCYALARM:




UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMLEVEL: 59.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01

UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMDELAY: 1.0s


UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERFREQUENCYTRIP: Off




UNDERFREQUENCY TRIPLEVEL: 59.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01

UNDERFREQUENCY TRIPDELAY: 1.0s




5

5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY

FUNCTION:

Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) rises above theoverfrequency pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.

APPLICATION:

This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shedan entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.

The Overfrequency element is only active when the motor is running.

OVERFREQUENCY BLOCK OVERFREQUENCYFROM START:


OVERFREQUENCYALARM:




OVERFREQUENCY ALARMLEVEL: 60.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01

OVERFREQUENCY ALARMDELAY: 1.0s


OVERFREQUENCY ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

OVERFREQUENCYTRIP: Off




OVERFREQUENCY TRIPLEVEL: 60.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01

OVERFREQUENCY TRIPDELAY: 1.0s



5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 8 MENU

These protective elements rely on CTs and VTs being installed and setpoints programmed. The power ele-ments are only shown if the 369 has option M or B installed.

By convention, an induction motor consumes Watts and vars. This condition is displayed on the 369 as +Wattsand +vars. A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars or consume Watts and generate vars. Theseconditions are displayed on the 369 as +Watts, +vars, and +Watts, -vars respectively.

S8 SETPOINTSPOWER ELEMENTS

LEAD POWER FACTOR

LAG POWER FACTOR



UNDERPOWER

REVERSE POWER


5 SETPOINTS 5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS

5



5

5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LEAD POWER FACTOR

FUNCTION:

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the fieldhas been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field isapplied. From that point forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factoris less than the lead level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a lead condition.

APPLICATION:

The lead power factor alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.

LEAD POWER FACTOR BLOCK LEAD PFFROM START: 1 s


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM: Off




LEAD POWER FACTORALARM LEVEL: 0.30


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM DELAY: 1.0s


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP: Off




LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP LEVEL: 0.30


LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP DELAY: 1.0s




5

5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LAG POWER FACTOR

FUNCTION:

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the fieldhas been applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field isapplied. From that point forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factoris less than the lag level, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating lag condition.

APPLICATION:

The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step for a synchronous motor.

LAG POWER FACTOR BLOCK LAG PFFROM START: 1 s


LAG POWER FACTORALARM: Off




LAG POWER FACTORALARM LEVEL: 0.85


LAG POWER FACTORALARM DELAY: 1.0s


LAG POWER FACTORALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

LAG POWER FACTORTRIP: Off




LAG POWER FACTORTRIP LEVEL: 0.80


LAG POWER FACTORTRIP DELAY: 1.0s




5

5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

FUNCTION:

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has beenapplied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. Fromthat point forward, the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the positivelevel, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a positive kvar condition. The reactive poweralarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step.


BLOCK +kvar ELEMENTFROM START: 1 s


POSITIVE kvarALARM: Off




POSITIVE kvar ALARMLEVEL: 10 kvar

Range: 1 - 25000 kvar in steps of 1

POSITIVE kvarALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


POSITIVE kvarALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

POSITIVE kvarTRIP:




POSITIVE kvar TRIPLEVEL: 25 kvar


POSITIVE kvarTRIP DELAY: 1.0 s




5

5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER

FUNCTION:

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has beenapplied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. Fromthat point forward, the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the negativelevel, for the specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a negative kvar condition. The reactive poweralarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.


BLOCK -kvar ELEMENTFROM START: 1s


NEGATIVE kvarALARM:




NEGATIVE kvar ALARMLEVEL: 10 kvar


NEGATIVE kvarALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


NEGATIVE kvarALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

NEGATIVE kvarTRIP:




NEGATIVE kvar TRIPLEVEL: 25 kvar


NEGATIVE kvarTRIP DELAY: 1.0s




5

5.9.6 UNDERPOWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS UNDERPOWER

FUNCTION:

If enabled, once the magnitude of 3∅ total real power falls below the pickup level for a period of time specifiedby the delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running andwill be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the block underpower fromstart setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element tripsor alarms). A value of 0 means the feature is not blocked from start. If a value other than 0 is entered, the fea-ture will be disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start is detected until the time enteredexpires. The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations.

APPLICATION:

Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a sig-nificant loss of current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitivedetection of load loss or pump cavitation. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.

UNDERPOWER BLOCK UNDERPOWERFROM START: 1s


UNDERPOWERALARM:




UNDERPOWER ALARMLEVEL: 2 kW


UNDERPOWERALARM DELAY: 1 s


UNDERPOWERALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERPOWERTRIP: Off




UNDERPOWER TRIPLEVEL: 1 kW


UNDERPOWERTRIP DELAY: 1 s




5

5.9.7 REVERSE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS REVERSE POWER

If enabled, once the magnitude of 3∅ total power exceeds the pickup level in the reverse direction (negativekW) for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur.

NOTE: The minimum magnitude of power measurement is determined by the phase CT minimum of5% rated CT primary. If the level for reverse power is set below that level, a trip or alarm willonly occur once the phase current exceeds the 5% cutoff.

REVERSE POWER BLOCK REVERSE POWERFROM START: 1 s


REVERSE POWERALARM: Off



Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combination

REVERSE POWER ALARMLEVEL: 1 kW


REVERSE POWERALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


REVERSE POWERALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

REVERSE POWERTRIP:




REVERSE POWER TRIPLEVEL: 1 kW

Range: 1-25000 kW in steps of 1

REVERSE POWERTRIP DELAY: 1.0 s

Range: 0.5 - 30 s in steps of 0.5


5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 9 MENU

Note: The Access switch is predefined and is non programmable.

S9 SETPOINTSDIGITAL INPUTS

SPARE SWITCH

EMERGENCY RESTART

DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

SPEED SWITCH

REMOTE RESET


5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

5

5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPARE SWITCH

In addition to the normal selections, the Spare Switch may be used as a starter status contact input. An auxil-iary ‘a’ type contact follows the state of the main contactor or breaker and an auxiliary ‘b’ type contact is in theopposite state.

This feature is recommended for use on all motors. It is essential for proper operation of start inhibits, espe-cially when the motor may be run lightly or unloaded. The CTs may not be able to pick up the reduced currentlevels. This is more common on synchronous motor applications.

5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS EMERGENCY RESTART

In addition to the normal selections, the Emergency Restart Switch may be used as a emergency restart inputto the 369 to override protection for the motor.

When the emergency restart switch is closed all trip and alarm functions are reset. Thermal capacity used isset to zero and all protective elements are disabled until the switch is opened. Starts per hour are also reducedby one each time the switch is closed. The display will state ‘Emergency Restart Override’ while this switch isclosed if assigned to Emergency Restart.

5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

In addition to the normal selections, the Differential Switch may be used as a contact input for a separate exter-nal 86 (differential trip) relay. Contact closure will cause the 369 relay to issue a differential trip.

SPARE SWITCH SPARE SW FUNCTION:Off

Range: Off, Starter Status, General, DigitalCounter, Waveform Capture, Simulate PreFault,Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault

STARTER AUX CONTACTTYPE: 52a

Range: 52a, 52bOnly seen if function is Starter Status

EMERGENCY RESTART EMERGENCY FUNCTION:Emergency Restart

Range: Off, Emergency Restart, General, DigitalCounter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault,Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault

DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH DIFF SW FUNCTION:Differential Switch

Range: Off, Differential Switch, General, DigitalCounter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault,Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault

ASSIGN DIFF RELAY:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinationsOnly seen if function is Differential Switch



5

5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPEED SWITCH

In addition to the normal selections, the Speed Switch may be used as an input for an external speed switch.

This allows the 369 to utilize a speed device for locked rotor protection. During a motor start, if no contact clo-sure occurs within the programmed time delay, a trip will occur. The speed input must be opened for a speedswitch trip to be reset.

5.10.6 REMOTE RESET

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS REMOTE RESET

In addition to the normal selections, the Remote Reset may be used as a contact input to reset the relay.

SPEED SWITCH SPEED SW FUNCTION:Speed Switch

Range: Off, Speed Switch, General, DigitalCounter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault,Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault

SPEED SW TRIP RELAY:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinationsOnly seen if function is Speed Switch

SPEED SWITCH TIMEDELAY: 2.0s

Range: 0.5 - 100.0s in steps of 0.5Only seen if function is Speed Switch

REMOTE RESET REMOTE SW FUNCTION:Remote Reset

Range: Off, Remote Reset, General, DigitalCounter, Waveform Capture, Simulate Pre-Fault,Simulate Fault, Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault


5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

5

5.10.7 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS

a) GENERAL

Any of the programmable digital inputs may be selected and programmed as a separate General Switch Input.

xxxxx SW FUNCTION:General

GENERAL SWITCHNAME: General

Range: 12 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is selected as General

GENERAL SWITCHTYPE: NO

Range: NO (normally open), NC (normally closed)Only seen if function is selected as General

BLOCK INPUT FROMSTART: 0 s

Range: 0 - 5000 s in steps of 1Only seen if function is selected as General

GENERAL SWITCHALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is selected as General


Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsof them. Only seen if function is selected as General

GENERAL SWITCHALARM DELAY: 5.0 s

Range: 0.1 - 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1Only seen if function is selected as General

RECORD ALARMS ASEVENTS: No

Range: No, YesOnly seen if function is selected as General

GENERAL SWITCHTRIP: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is selected as General


Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations ofthem. Only seen if function is selected as General

GENERAL SWITCHTRIP DELAY: 5.0 s

Range: 0.1 - 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1Only seen if function is selected as General



5

b) DIGITAL COUNTER

Only one digital input may be selected as a digital counter at a time. User defined units and counter name maybe defined and these will appear on all counter related actual value and alarm messages. To clear a digitalcounter alarm, the alarm level must be increased or the counter must be cleared or preset to a lower value.

c) WAVEFORM CAPTURE

The Waveform Capture setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to capture a waveform upon command (con-tact closure). The captured waveforms can then be displayed via the 369PC program.

d) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT

The Simulate Pre-Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault settings asprogrammed. This is typically used for relay or system testing.

e) SIMULATE FAULT

The Simulate Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the fault settings as pro-grammed. This is typically used for relay or system testing.

f) SIMULATE PRE-FAULT to FAULT

The Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to start simulating the pre-fault tofault settings as programmed. This is typically used for relay or system testing.

DIGITAL COUNTER COUNTERNAME: Counter

Range: 8 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

COUNTERUNITS: Units

Range: 6 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

COUNTERTYPE: Increment

Range: Increment, DecrementOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

DIGITAL COUNTERALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is Digital Counter


Range: None,Alarm,Aux1, Aux2, or combina-tions. Only seen if function is Digital Counter

COUNTER ALARM LEVEL:100

Range: 0 - 65535 in steps of 1Only seen if function is Digital Counter

RECORD ALARMS ASEVENTS: No

Range: No, YesOnly seen if function is Digital Counter


5 SETPOINTS 5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS

5

5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5.11.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 10 MENU

5.11.2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

PATH: S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1,2,3,4

S10 SETPOINTSANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUT 1

ANALOG OUTPUT 2

ANALOG OUTPUT 3

ANALOG OUTPUT 4

ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1:DISABLED

Range: Disabled, Enabled

ANALOG OUTPUT 1RANGE: 0-1 mA

Range: 0 - 1mA, 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA.

ANALOG OUTOUT 1Phase A Current

Range: See Analog Output selection table

ANALOG OUTOUT 1MIN: 0 A


ANALOG OUTOUT 1MAX: 100 A


ANALOG OUTPUT 2 See Analog Output 1 fordetails




5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.11.3 ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION

Table 5–3: ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS

PARAMETER NAME RANGE /UNITS StepDEFAULT

Minimum Maximum

Phase A Current 0-65535 AMPS 1 0 100

Phase B Current 0-65535 AMPS 1 0 100

Phase C Current 0-65535 AMPS 1 0 100

Avg. Phase Current 0-65535 AMPS 1 0 100

AB Line Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 3200 4500

BC Line Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 3200 4500

CA Line Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 3200 4500

Avg. Line Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 3200 4500

Phase AN Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 1900 2500

Phase BN Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 1900 2500

Phase CN Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 1900 2500

Avg. Phase Voltage 50-20000 VOLTS 1 1900 2500

Hottest Stator RTD -40 to +200oC or -40 to +392oF 1 0 200

RTD #1 - 12 -40 to +200oC or -40 to +392oF 1 -40 200

Remote RTD #1 - 12 -40 to +200oC or -40 to +392oF 1 -40 200

Power Factor 0.01 to 1.00 lead/lag 0.01 0.8 lag 0.8lead

Reactive Power -30000 to 30000 kvar 1 0 750

Real Power -30000 to 30000 kW 1 0 1000

Apparent Power 0 to 50000 kVA 1 0 1250

Thermal Capacity Used 0-100% 1 0 100

Relay Lockout Time 0-500 MINUTES 1 0 150

Current Demand 0-65535 AMPS 1 0 700

kvar Demand 0 -50000 kvar 1 0 1000

kW Demand 0 -50000 kW 1 0 1250

kVA Demand 0 -50000 kVA 1 0 1500

Motor Load 0.00 - 20.00 x FLA 0.01 0.00 1.25

MWhrs 0.000 to 999999.999 MWhrs 0.001 50.000 100.000


5 SETPOINTS 5.12 S11 369 TESTING

5

5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5.12.1 SETPOINTS PAGE 11 MENU

5.12.2 SIMULATION MODE

PATH: S11 369 TESTING SIMULATION MODE

The 369 may be placed in several simulation modes. This simulation may be useful for several purposes. First,it may be used to understand the operation of the 369 for learning or training purposes. Second, simulationmay be used during startup to verify that control circuitry operates as it should in the event of a trip, alarm, orblock start. In addition, simulation may be used to verify that setpoints had been set properly in the event offault conditions.

Simulation mode may be entered only if the motor is stopped and there are no trips, alarms, or block startsactive. The values entered as Pre-Fault Values will be substituted for the measured values in the 369 when thesimulation mode is 'Simulate Pre-Fault'. The values entered as Fault Values will be substituted for the mea-sured values in the 369 when the simulation mode is 'Simulate Fault'. If the simulation mode: Pre-Fault to Faultis selected, the Pre-Fault values will be substituted for the period of time specified by the delay, followed by theFault values. If a trip occurs, simulation mode will revert to Off. Selecting 'Off' for the simulation mode will alsoplace the 369 back in service. If the 369 measures phase current or control power is cycled, simulation modewill automatically revert to Off.

S11 SETPOINTS369 TESTING

SIMULATION MODE

PRE-FAULT SETUP

FAULT SETUP

FORCE OUPUT RELAYS

FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS

SIMULATION MODE SIMULATION MODE:Off

Range: Off, Pre-Fault, Fault,Pre-Fault to Fault

PRE-FAULT TO FAULTTIME DELAY: 10 s

Range: 0 - 300 s in steps of 1Only shown if in Pre-Fault to Fault mode


5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.12.3 PRE-FAULT SETUP

PATH: S11 369 TESTING PRE-FAULT SETUP

The values entered under Pre-Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metred values when the simulationmode is in Pre-Fault mode.

PRE-FAULT SETUP: PRE-FAULT CURRENTPHASE A: 0.00x CT

Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01

PRE-FAULT CURRENTPHASE B: 0.00x CT

Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01

PRE-FAULT CURRENTPHASE C: 0.00x CT

Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01

PRE-FAULT CURRENTGROUND: 0.0 A

Range: 0.0 - 5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A),0.00 - 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 for 50: 0.025 CT

PRE-FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE A: 0.00x RATED


PRE-FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE B: 0.00x RATED


PRE-FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE C: 0.00x RATED


PRE-FAULT CURRENTLAGS VOLTAGE: 0 °

Range: 0 - 359 ° in steps of 1

PRE-FAULT SYSTEMFREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz

Range: 25.0 - 70.0 Hz in steps of 0.1

PRE-FAULT STATOR RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °

Range: - 40 to 200 o in steps of 1

PRE-FAULT BEARINGRTD TEMP: 40 °


PRE-FAULT OTHER RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °


PRE-FAULT AMBIENTRTD TEMP: 40 °




5

5.12.4 FAULT SETUP

PATH: S11 369 TESTING FAULT SETUP

The values entered under Fault Setup will be substituted for the real metered values when the simulation modeis in Fault mode.

FAULT SETUP: FAULT CURRENTPHASE A: 0.00x CT


FAULT CURRENTPHASE B: 0.00x CT


FAULT CURRENTPHASE C: 0.00x CT


FAULT CURRENTGROUND: 0.0 A

Range: 0.0-5000.0 A in steps of 0.1 (1A/5A),0.00 - 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 for 50: 0.025 CT

FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE A: 0.00x RATED

Range: 0.00 -1.10 in steps of 0.01

FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE B: 0.00x RATED


FAULT VOLTAGEPHASE C: 0.00x RATED


FAULT CURRENT LAGSVOLTAGE: 0 °

Range: 0 - 359 o in steps of 1

FAULT SYSTEMFREQUENCY: 60.0 Hz

Range: 25.0 - 70.0 Hz in steps of 0.1

FAULT STATOR RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °


FAULT BEARING RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °


FAULT OTHER RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °


FAULT AMBIENT RTDTEMPERATURE: 40 °



5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.12.5 FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

PATH: S11 369 TESTING FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

The Test Output Relay feature provides a method of performing checks on all relay contact outputs. The fea-ture can also be used for control purposes while the motor is running. The forced state overrides the normaloperation of the relay output.

The forced state if enabled (energized or de-energized) will force the selected relay into the programmed statefor as long as the programmed duration. After the programmed duration expires the forced state will return todisabled and relay operation will return to normal. If the duration is programmed as Static the forced state willremain in effect until changed or disabled. If control power to the 369 is interrupted, any forced relay conditionwill be removed.

FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE TRIP RELAY:Disabled

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized

FORCE TRIP RELAYDURATION: Static

Range: Static, 1-300 s in steps of 1

FORCE AUX1 RELAY:Disabled


FORCE AUX1 RELAYDURATION: Static


FORCE AUX2 RELAY:Disabled


FORCE AUX2 RELAY:DURATION: Static


FORCE ALARM RELAY:Disabled


FORCE ALARM RELAYDURATION: Static




5

5.12.6 FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS

PATH: S11 369 TESTING FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS

In addition to the simulation modes, the Force Analog Output setpoints may be used during startup or testing toverify that the analog outputs are functioning correctly. It may also be used when the motor is running to givemanual or communication control of an analog output. Forcing an analog output overrides its normal function-ality.

When the Force Analog Outputs Function is enabled, the output will reflect the forced value as a percentage ofthe range 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, or 0-1 mA. Selecting Off will place the analog output channels back in service,reflecting the parameters programmed to each.

FORCE ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOGOUTPUT 1: Off

Range: Off, 1 - 100% in steps of 1%

FORCE ANALOGOUTPUT 2: Off







6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU

A1 ACTUAL VALUESSTATUS

MOTOR STATUS

LAST TRIP DATA

ALARM STATUS

START INHIBIT STATUS

DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

REAL TIME CLOCK

A2 ACTUAL VALUESMETERING DATA

CURRENT METERING

VOLTAGE METERING

POWER METERING

LOCAL RTD

REMOTE RTD

DEMAND METERING

PHASORS

A3 ACTUAL VALUESLEARNED DATA

MOTOR DATA

LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS


6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

A4 ACTUAL VALUESSTATISTICAL DATA

TRIP COUNTERS

MOTOR STATISTICS

A5 ACTUAL VALUESEVENT RECORD

EVENT: 40

EVENT: 39

EVENT: 2

EVENT: 1

A6 ACTUAL VALUESRELAY INFORMATION

MODEL INFORMATION

FIRMWARE VERSION


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS

6

6.2 A1 STATUS 6.2.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 1 MENU

A1 ACTUAL VALUESSTATUS

MOTOR STATUS

LAST TRIP DATA

ALARM STATUS


DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

REAL TIME CLOCK


6.2 A1 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.2.2 MOTOR STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS MOTOR STATUS

These messages describe the status of the motor at the current point in time. The Motor Status message indi-cates the current state of the motor.

The Motor Thermal Capacity Used message indicates the current level which is used by the overload and cool-ing algorithms. The Estimated Trip Time On Overload is only active for the Overload motor status.

MOTOR STATUS MOTOR STATUS:Stopped

Range: Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload,Tripped

MOTOR THERMALCAPACITY USED: 0%

Range: 0-100% in steps of 1%

ESTIMATED TRIP TIMEON OVERLOAD: Never

Range: Never, 0-65500s in steps of 1

Motor State DefinitionStopped phase current = 0 Amps and starter status input = breaker/contactor closed

Starting motor previously stopped and phase current has gone from 0 to >FLA

Running phase current >0 and <FLA or starter status input = breaker/contactorclosed and motor was previouly running

Overload motor previously running and phase current now > FLA

Tripped a trip has been issued and not cleared



6

6.2.3 LAST TRIP DATA

PATH: A1 STATUS LAST TRIP DATA

Immediately prior to a trip, the 369 takes a snapshot of the metered parameters along with the cause of trip andthe date and time and stores this as pre-trip values. This allows for ease of troubleshooting when a trip occurs.Instantaneous trips on starting (<50ms) may not allow all values to be captured. These values are overwrittenwhen the next trip occurs. The event record shows details of the last 40 events including trips.

LAST TRIP DATA CAUSE OF LAST TRIP:No Trip to date

Range: No Trip to Date, cause of trip

TIME OF LAST TRIP:00:00:00

Range: hour : min : seconds

DATE OF LAST TRIP:Jan 01 1999

Range: month day year

A: 0 : 0

A: 0 B: 0C: 0 A Pretrip

Range: 0-100000 A in steps of 1

MOTOR LOADPretrip 0.00 x FLA


CURRENT UNBALANCEPretrip: 0%

Range: 0-100 % in steps of 1 %

GROUND CURRENTPretrip: 0.00 Amps

Range: 0.0-5000.0 in steps of 0.1 for 1A/5A CT,0.00 - 25.00 in steps of 0.01 for 50 : 0.025 A CT

HOTTEST STATOR RTDRTD#1 0°C Pretrip

Range: -40 to +200 in steps of 1Only shown if a stator RTD is programmed

Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V Pretrip

Range: 0-20000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection is programmed

Van: 0 Vbn: 0Vcn: 0 V Pretrip

Range: 0-20000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection is Wye

SYSTEM FREQUENCYPretrip: 0.00 Hz

Range: 0.00, 15.00-120.00 in steps of 0.01Only shown if VT connection is programmed

0 kW 0 kVA0 kvar Pretrip

Range: -50000 to +50000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection is programmed

POWER FACTORPretrip: 1.00

Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 leadOnly shown if VT connection is programmed



6

6.2.4 ALARM STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS ALARM STATUS

Any active trips or alarms may be viewed here. If there is more than one active trip or alarm, using the Line Upand Down keys will cycle through all the active alarm messages. If the Line Up and Down keys are notpressed, the active messages will automatically cycle. The current level causing the alarm is displayed alongwith the alarm name.

6.2.5 START INHIBIT STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS START INHIBIT STATUS

Overload Lockout Timer: Determined from the thermal model, this is the remaining amount of time left beforethe thermal capacity available will be sufficient to allow another start and the start inhibit will be removed.

Start Inhibit Timer: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time for the Thermal Capacity to reduce toa level to allow for a safe start according to the Start Inhibit setpoints.

Time Between Starts Timer: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time from the last start before thestart inhibit will be removed and another start may be attempted. This time is measure from the beginning ofthe last motor start.

Starts/Hour Timer: If enabled this display will indicate the number of starts within the last hour by showing thetime remaining in each. The oldest start will be on the left. Once the time of one start reaches 0, it is no longerconsidered a start within the hour and is removed from the display and any remaining starts are shifted over tothe left.

Backspin Timer: This timer is only available with the B option. It is the time the motor will be blocked fromstarting while backspinning.

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES No Trips or Alarmsare Active

Range: No Trips or Alarms are Active, ac-tive alarm name and level, active trip name

START INHIBIT STATUS NO START INHIBITSACTIVE

Range: n/aOnly shown when all inhibits are inactive

OVERLOAD LOCKOUTTIMER: 0 min

Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1Only shown after an overload trip

START INHIBITTIMER: 0 min

Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1Only shown if START INHIBIT enabled

STARTS/HOUR TIMERS:0 0 0 0 0 min

Range: 1-60 min in steps of 1Only shown if STARTS PER HOUR enabled

TIME BETWEEN STARTSTIMER: 0 min

Range: 1-500 min in steps of 1Only shown if TIME BETWEEN STARTS

RESTART BLOCK TIMER:0 s

Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1Only shown if RESTART BLOCK enabled

BACKSPIN TIMER:20 min

Range: 1 - 255 min steps of 1Only shown if BSD enabled



6

Restart Block Timer: If enabled this display will reflect the amount of time since the last motor stop before thestart block will be removed and another start may be attempted.

6.2.6 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

The current state of the digital inputs will be displayed here.

6.2.7 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

The current state of the output relays will be displayed here. Energized indicates that the NO contacts are nowclosed and the NC contacts are now open. De-energized indicates that the NO contacts are now open and theNC contacts are now closed. Forced indicates that the output relay has been commanded into a certain state.

DIGITAL INPUT STATUS EMERGENCY RESTART:Open

Range: Open, ClosedNote: Programmed input name displayed

DIFFERENTIAL RELAY:Open


SPEED SWITCH:Open


RESET:Open


ACCESS:Open


SPARE:Open


OUTPUT RELAY STATUS TRIP: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced

ALARM: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced

AUX 1: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced

AUX 2: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized, Forced



6

6.2.8 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: A1 STATUS REAL TIME CLOCK

The date and time from the 369 real time clock may be viewed here.

REAL TIME CLOCK DATE: 01/01/1999TIME: 00:00:00

Range: month/day/year,hour: minute: second


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 A2 METERING DATA

6

6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6.3.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 2 MENU

6.3.2 CURRENT METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

All measured current values are displayed here. Note that the unblance level is derated below FLA. See theunbalance setpoint for more details.

A2 ACTUAL VALUESMETERING DATA

CURRENT METERING

VOLTAGE METERING

POWER METERING

LOCAL RTD

REMOTE RTD

DEMAND METERING

PHASORS

CURRENT METERINGA: 0 : 0

A: 0 B: 0C: 0 Amps


AVERAGE PHASECURRENT: 0 Amps


MOTOR LOAD:0.00 X FLA


CURRENT UNBALANCE:0%

Range: 0 - 100 % in steps of 1 %

GROUND CURRENT:0.0 Amps

Range: 0.0 - 5000.0 in steps of 0.1 for 1A/5A CT, 0.0 - 25.0 in steps of 0.1 for


6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.3.3 VOLTAGE METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA VOLTAGE METERING

Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here. If option M or B has not been installed, the following mes-sage will appear when attempting to enter this section.

VOLTAGE METERING Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V RMS φ- φ

Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if a VT connection programmed

AVERAGE LINEVOLTAGE: 0 V

Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

Va: 0 Vb: 0Vc: 0 V RMS φ-N

Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if a Wye VT connection pro-

AVERAGE PHASEVOLTAGE: 0 V

Range: 0-20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if a Wye VT connection pro-

SYSTEM FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz

Range: 0.00, 15.00 - 120.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

BACKSPIN FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz

Range: 2 - 120 Hz in steps of 0.01Only shown if option B installed

THIS FEATURE NOTINSTALLED



6

6.3.4 POWER METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA POWER METERING

The values for three phase power metering, consumption and generation will be displayed here. If option M orB has not been installed the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.

POWER METERING POWER FACTOR:1.00

Range: 0.00-1.00 lag or leadOnly shown if VT connection programmed

REAL POWER:0 kW

Range: 0-±50000 kW in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

REAL POWER:0 hp

Range: 0-65000 hp in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

REACTIVE POWER:0 kvar

Range: 0-±50000 kvar in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

APPARENT POWER:0 kVA

Range: 0-50000 kVA in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

POSITIVE WATTHOURS:0.000 MWh

Range: 0.000-999999.999 in steps of .001Only shown if VT connection programmed

POSITIVE VARHOURS:0.000 MVarh


NEGATIVE VARHOURS:0.000 MVarh





6

6.3.5 LOCAL RTD

PATH: A2 METERING DATA LOCAL RTD

The temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The pro-grammed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. Ifoption R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.

LOCAL RTD HOTTEST STATOR RTDNUMBER: 1

Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

HOTTEST STATOR RTDTEMPERATURE: 40°C

Range: -40 to 200°C or -40 to 392 °F,No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD

RTD #1TEMPERATURE: 40°C



























6

6.3.6 REMOTE RTD

PATH: A2 METERING DATA REMOTE RTD

The temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if programmed and connected to a RRTDmodule. The name of each RRTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. Ifoption R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.

If communications with the RRTD module is lost, the following message will appear:.

REMOTE RTD HOTTEST STATOR RRTDNUMBER: 1

Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

HOTTEST STATOR RTDTEMPERATURE: 40°C


RRTD #1TEMPERATURE: 40°C

























RRTD MODULECOMMUNICATIONS LOST



6

6.3.7 DEMAND METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA DEMAND METERING

The values for current and power demand are displayed here. Peak demand information can be cleared usingthe CLEAR PEAK DEMAND command located in S1 369 SETUP under CLEAR/PRESET DATA. Demand isonly shown for positive real (kW) and reactive (kvar) powers. Only the current demand will be visible if optionsM or B are not installed.

DEMAND METERING CURRENTDEMAND: 0 Amps


REAL POWERDEMAND: 0 kW

Range: 0-50000 kW in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

REACTIVE POWERDEMAND: 0 kvar

Range: -32000-32000 kvar in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

APPARENT POWERDEMAND: 0 kVA


PEAK CURRENTDEMAND: 0 Amps


PEAK REAL POWERDEMAND: 0 kW

Range: 0-50000 kW in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

PEAK REACTIVE POWERDEMAND: 0 kvar

Range: -32000-32000 kvar in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

PEAK APPARENT POWERDEMAND: 0 kVA




6

6.3.8 PHASORS

PATH: A2 METERING DATA PHASORS

All angles shown are with respect to the reference phasor. The reference phasor is based on the VT connec-tion type. In the event that option M has not been installed, VAN for Wye is 0V, or VAB for Delta is 0V, then IA willbe used as the reference phasor.

Note that the phasor display is not intended to be used as a protective metering element. Its prime purpose isto diagnose errors in wiring connections.

PHASORS Ia PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag

Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1

Ib PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag


Ic PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag


Va PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag

Range: 0 - 359 degrees in steps of 1Only shown if VT connection programmed

Vb PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag


Vc PHASOR:0A at 0°Lag


Reference Phasor VT Connection TypeIA None

VAN Wye

VAB Delta


6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6.4.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 3 MENU

This page contains the data the 369 learns to adapt itself to the motor protected.

6.4.2 MOTOR DATA

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA MOTOR DATA

The learned values for acceleration time and starting current are the average of the individual values acquiredfor the last five successful starts. The value for starting current is used when learned k factor is enabled.

The learned value for starting capacity is the amount of thermal capacity required for a start that has beendetermined by the 369 from the last five successful motor starts. The last five learned start capacities are aver-aged and a 25% safety margin is factored in. This is done to guarantee enough thermal capacity available tostart the motor. The Start Inhibit feature, when enabled, uses this value in determining lockout time.

A3 ACTUAL VALUESLEARNED DATA

MOTOR DATA

LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

MOTOR DATA LEARNED ACCELERATIONTIME: 0 s


LEARNED STARTINGCURRENT: 0 A


LEARNED STARTINGCAPACITY: 85 %


LEARNED RUNNING COOLTIME CONST.: 0 min


LEARNED STOPPED COOLTIME CONST.: 0 min


LAST STARTINGCURRENT: 0 A


LAST STARTINGCAPACITY: 85 %


LAST ACCELERATIONTIME: 0.0 s


AVERAGE MOTOR LOADLEARNED: 0.00 X FLA

Range: 0.00 - 20.00 X FLA in steps of 0.01

LEARNED UNBALANCE kFACTOR: 0



6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA

6

The learned cool time constants are displayed here. The learned value is the average of the last five measuredconstants. These learned cool time constants are used only when Enable Learned Cool Times feature of thethermal model is set to yes.

The learned unbalance k factor is displayed here. It is the average of the last five calculated k factors. Thelearned k factor is only used when unbalance biasing of thermal capacity is set on and to learned.

It should be noted that learned values are calculated even when the features requiring them are turned off.None of the learned features should be used until at least five successful motor starts and stops have beenaccomplished.

Values for starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time are also displayed for the last start.

The average motor load while running is displayed here. The motor load is averaged over a 15 minute slidingwindow.

Clearing motor data (see setpoints page 1) will set all these values to their default settings.


6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

The maximum temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled.The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message.If option R has not been installed, the following message will appear when attempting to enter this section.

If options R is enabled and no RTDs are programmed, the following message will appear when an attempt ismade to enter this group of messages..

LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS RTD #1 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C


RTD #2 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C























NO RTDs PROGRAMMED


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA

6

6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

The maximum temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has been programmedand connected to a RRTD module. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) willappear as the first line of each message. If an RRTD module is connected and no RRTDs are programmed,the following message will appear when an attempt is made to enter this group of messages..

REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS RRTD #1 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C


RRTD #2 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C






















NO RRTDs PROGRAMMED


6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6.5.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 4 MENU

6.5.2 TRIP COUNTERS

PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA TRIP COUNTERS

A4 ACTUAL VALUESSTATISTICAL DATA

TRIP COUNTERS

MOTOR STATISTICS

TRIP COUNTERS TOTAL NUMBER OFTRIPS: 0


INCOMPLETE SEQUENCETRIPS: 0


SWITCH TRIPS:0


OVERLOAD TRIPS:0


SHORT CIRCUITTRIPS: 0


MECHANICAL JAMTRIPS: 0


UNDERCURRENT TRIPS:0


CURRENT UNBALANCETRIPS: 0


SINGLE PHASETRIPS: 0


GROUND FAULT TRIPS:0


DIFFERENTIAL TRIPS:0


ACCELERATION TRIPS:0


STATOR RTDTRIPS: 0


BEARING RTDTRIPS: 0


OTHER RTDTRIPS: 0



6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA

6

A breakdown of the number of trips by type is displayed here. When the total reaches 50000, the counterresets to 0 on the next trip. This information can be cleared in the Clear/Preset Data section of setpoints pageone. The date the counters are cleared will be recorded.

AMBIENT RTDTRIPS: 0


UNDER VOLTAGETRIPS: 0


OVER VOLTAGETRIPS: 0


PHASE REVERSALTRIPS: 0


UNDERFREQUENCYTRIPS: 0


OVERFREQUENCYTRIPS: 0


LEAD POWER FACTORTRIPS: 0


LAG POWER FACTORTRIPS: 0


POSITIVE REACTIVETRIPS: 0


NEGATIVE REACTIVETRIPS: 0


UNDERPOWER TRIPS:0


REVERSE POWER:0


TRIP COUNTERS LASTCLEARED: 01/01/1999

Date: month / day / year


6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.5.3 MOTOR STATISTICS

PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA MOTOR STATISTICS

The number of motor starts and emergency restarts is recorded here. This information may be useful whentroubleshooting a motor failure or in understanding the history and use of a motor for maintenace purposes.When either of these counters reaches 50000, it will automatically be reset to 0.

Motor running hours displays the amount of time that the 369 has detected the motor in a running state (currentapplied and/or starter status indicating contactor/breaker closed).

The motor starts, emergency restarts and running hours counters may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/clear data section, by clearing motor data.

The digital counter will be displayed when one of the digital inputs has been set up as a digital counter. The dig-ital counter may be cleared in setpoints page 1, preset/clear data section, by clearing or presetting the digitalcounter. When the digital counter reaches 65535, it will automatically be reset by the 369 to 0.

MOTOR STATISTICS NUMBER OF MOTORSTARTS: 0


NUMBER OF EMERGENCYRESTARTS: 0


MOTOR RUNNING HOURS:0 hrs


DIGITAL COUNTER:0

Range: 0-65535 in steps of 1Shown if counter set to a digital input


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD

6

6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6.6.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 5 MENU

6.6.2 EVENT 01

PATH: A5 EVENT RECORD EVENT 01

A5 ACTUAL VALUESEVENT RECORD

EVENT: 40

EVENT: 39

EVENT: 02

EVENT: 01

EVENT 01 TIME OF EVENT 01:00:00:00:00

Time: hours / minutes / seconds / hundredsof seconds

DATE OF EVENT 01:Jan. 01, 1999

Date: month / day / year

A: 0 B: 0C: 0 A EVENT 01


MOTOR LOAD EVENT 01:0.00 X FLA

Range: 0.00 - 20.00 in steps of 0.01

CURRENT UNBALANCE:EVENT 01: 0 %


GROUND CURRENT:EVENT 01: 0 Amps

Range:0.0-5000.0 steps of 0.1 for 1A/5A CT,0.00-25.00 steps of 0.01 for 50 : 0.025 A CT

HOTTEST STATORRTD1: 0°C EVENT 01


Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V EVENT 01

Range: 0 - 20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Delta

Van: 0 Vbn: 0Vcn: 0 V EVENT 01

Range: 0 - 20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT Connection Programmed Wye

SYSTEM FREQUENCY:EVENT 01: 0.00 Hz

Range: 0.00, 15.00 - 120 Hz in steps of 1Only shown if VT Connection Programmed

0 kW 0 kVA0 kvar EVENT 01

Range: - 50000 - + 50000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT Connection Programmed


6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

A breakdown of the last 40 events is available here along with the cause of the event and the date and time. Alltrips automatically trigger an event. Alarms only trigger an event if turned on for that alarm. Loss or applicationof control power, service alarm and emergency restart opening and closing also triggers an event. After 40events have been recorded, the oldest one is removed when a new one is added. The event record may becleared in the setpoints page 1, clear/preset data, clear event record section.

POWER FACTOR:EVENT 01: 1.00

Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 leadOnly shown if VT Connection Programmed


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION

6

6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6.7.1 ACTUAL VALUES PAGE 6 MENU

6.7.2 MODEL INFORMATION

PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION MODEL INFORMATION

369 model and manufacture information may be viewed her. The last calibration date is the date the relay waslast calibrated at GE Multilin.

6.7.3 FIRMWARE VERSION

PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION FIRMWARE VERSION

This information reflects the revisions of the software currently running in the 369. This information should benoted and recorded before calling for technical support or service.

A6 ACTUAL VALUESRELAY INFORMATION

MODEL INFORMATION

FIRMWARE VERSION

MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE:369-HI-R-M-F-P

Range: 369 HI/LO, R/0, M/B/0, F/0, P/0

SERIAL NUMBER:MXXXXXXXX

Range: See Autolabel.

INSTALLED OPTIONS:None

Range: None, RTD, Meter, BSD, Fiber, Profibus

INSTALLED OPTIONS: Range: RTD, Meter, BSD, Fiber, ProfibusOnly seen if previous display overflowed

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:Jan. 01 1999

Range: month/day/year

LAST CALIBRATIONDATE: Jan. 01 1999

Range: month/day/year

FIRMWARE VERSION FIRMWARE REVISION:XXXXXXXX

BOOT REVISION:XXXXXXXX

MODIFICATION NUMBER:000


7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

7

7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON 7.1.1 369 AND 269 PLUS COMPARISON

Table 7–1: COMPARISON BETWEEN 369 AND 269 PLUS

369 269 Plus

All options can be turned on or added in the field Must be returned for option change or add otherdevices

Current and optional voltage inputs are included on allrelays

Current inputs only. Must use additional meter deviceto obtain voltage and power measurements.

Optional 12 RTDs With an additional 12 RTDsavailable with the RRTD. All RTDs are individuallyconfigured (100P, 100N, 120N, 10C)

10 RTDs not programmable, must be specified at timeof order.

Fully programmable digital inputs No programmable digital inputs

4 programmable analog outputs assignable to 49parameters

1 Analog output programmable for 5 parameters

1 RS232 (19.2K BAUD), 3 RS485 (1200 TO 19.2KBAUD programmable) communication ports. AlsoOptional profibus port and optional fibre optics port

1 RS485 Communication port (2400 BAUD max.)

Flash memory firmware upgrade thru PC softwareand comm port

EPROM must be replaced to change firmware

EVENT RECORDER - time and date stamp last 40events. Records all trips and alarms are selectable

Displays cause of last trip and last event

OSCILLOGRAPHY – up to 64 cycles @ 16 samples/cycle for last event(s)

N/A

TESTING\SIMULATION function to force relays,analog outputs and simulate metered values

Exercise relays, force RTDs, force analog output

Programmable text message(s) N/A

Backspin frequency detection and backspin timer Backspin timer

Starter failure indication N/A

Measures up to 20xCT @ 16 samples/cycle Measures up to 12xCT @ 12 samples/cycle

15 standard overload curves 8 standard overload curves

Remote display is standard Remote display with mod


7.2 369 FAQs 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.2 369 FAQs 7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)

• What is the difference between Firmware and Software?

Firmware is the program running inside the relay, which is responsible for all relay protection and controlelements. Software is the program running on the PC, which is used to communicate with the relay andprovide relay control remotely in a user friendly format.

• How can I obtain copies of the latest manual and PC software?

I need it now!: Via Internet. tap://www.ge.com/edc/pm

I guess I can wait: Fax request to GE Multilin Literature department at (905) 201-2113

• Cannot communicate through the front port (RS232)

Check the following settings:

Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC

Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)

Baud rate setting on the master (PC or PLC) must match RS232 baud rate on the 369 relay.

Cable has to be a straight through cable, do not use null modem cables where pin 2 and 3 are transposed

Check the pin outs of RS232 cable (TX - pin 2, RX - pin 3, GND - pin 5)

• Cannot communicate with RS485

Check the following settings:

Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC

Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)

Baud rate must match between the relay and the master

Slave address polled must match between the relay and the master

Is terminating filter circuit present?

Are you communicating in half duplex? (369 communicates in half duplex mode only)

Is wiring correct? (“+” wire should go to “+” terminal of the relay, and “-” goes to “-” terminal)

Is the RS485 cable shield grounded? (shielding diminishes noise from external EM radiation)

Check the appropriate communication port LED on the relay. The LED should be solidly lit when communi-cating properly. The LED will blink on and off when the relay has communication difficulties and the LEDwill be off if no activity detected on communication lines.

• Can the 4 wire RS485 (full duplex) be used with 369?

No, the 369 communicates in 2-wire half duplex mode only. However, there are commercial RS485 con-verters that will convert a 4 wire to a 2 wire system.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.2 369 FAQs

7

• Can the 369 be used on Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)?

Yes it can. The following are important settings and notes on using 369 with VFD.

• Must set S2:/SYSTEM SETUP/CT/VT SETUP/NOMINAL SYSTEM FREQUENCY: Variable

• Frequency range of operation should not go below 15 Hz nor exceed 200 Hz

• CTs and VTs must be on the Motor side of the VFD drive

Important: PWM drives may cause the 369 to read wrong frequency due to extra zero crossings in the sig-nal

• Cannot store setpoint into the relay

Check and make sure the ACCESS switch is shorted and check for any PASSCODE restrictions.

• The 369 relay displays incorrect power reading, yet the power system is balanced, what could bethe possible reasons?

It is highly possible that the secondary wiring to the relay is not correct. Incorrect power can be read whenany of the A, B, or C phases are swapped, a CT or VT is wired backwards, or the relay is programmed asABC sequence when the power system is actually ACB and vice versa. The easiest way to verify is tocheck the voltage and the current phasor readings on the 369 relay and make sure that each respectivevoltage and current angles match.

• What are the merits of a residual ground fault connection versus a core balance connection?

The use of a zero sequence (core balance) CT to detect ground current is recommended over the G/Fresidual connection. This is especially true at motor starting.

During across-the-line starting of large motors, care must be taken to prevent the high inrush current fromoperating the ground element of the 369. This is especially true when using the residual connection of 2 or3 CTs.

In a residual connection, the unequal saturation of the current transformers, size and location of motor,size of power system, resistance in the power system from the source to the motor, type of iron used in themotor core & saturation density, and residual flux levels may all contribute to the production of a falseresidual current in the secondary or relay circuit. The common practice in medium and high voltage sys-tems is to use low resistance grounding. By using the “doughnut CT” scheme, such systems offer theadvantages of speed and reliability without much concern for starting current, fault contribution by themotor, or false residual current.

When a zero sequence CT is used, a voltage is generated in the secondary winding only when zerosequence current is flowing in the primary leads. Since virtually all motors have their neutrals ungrounded,no zero sequence current can flow in the motor leads unless there is a ground fault on the motor side.


7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts 7.3.1 DOs and DON’Ts

a) DOs

• Always check the power supply rating before applying power to the relay

Applying voltage greater than the maximum rating to the power supply (e.g. 120VAC to the low-voltagerated power supply) could result in component damage to the relay's power supply. This will result in theunit no longer being able to power up.

• Ensure that the 369 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and the con-nections of the connected CTs

Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.

• Ensure that the source CT and VT polarity match the relay CT and VT polarity

Polarity of the phase CTs is critical for power measurement, and residual ground current detection (ifused).

Polarity of the VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation.

• Properly ground the 369

Connect both the Filter Ground (terminal 123) and Safety Ground (terminal 126) of the 369 directly to themain GROUND BUS. The benefits of proper grounding of the 369 are numerous, e.g,

• Elimination of nuisance tripping

• Elimination of internal hardware failures

• Reliable operation of the relay

• Higher MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

• It is recommended that a tinned copper braided shielding and bonding cable be used. A Belden 8660cable or equivalent should be used as a minimum to connect the relay directly to the ground bus.

• Grounding of Phase and Ground CTs

All phase and Ground CTs must be grounded. The potential difference between the CT's ground and theground bus should be minimal (ideally zero).

It is highly recommended that the two CT leads be twisted together to minimize noise pickup, especiallywhen the highly sensitive 50:0.025 Ground CT sensor is used.

• RTDs

Consult the application notes of the 369 Instruction Manual for the full description of the 369 RTD circuitryand the different RTD wiring schemes acceptable for proper operation. However, for best results the follow-ing recommendations should be adhered to:

a) Use a 3 wire twisted, shielded cable to connect the RTDs from the motor to the 369. The shieldsshould be connected to the proper terminals on the back of the 369.

b) RTD shields are internally connected to the 369 ground (terminal #126) and must not be groundedanywhere else.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts

7

c) RTD signals can be characterized as very small, sensitive signals. Therefore, cables carrying RTD sig-nals should be routed as far away as possible from power carrying cables such as power supply andCT cables.

d) If, after wiring the RTD leads to the 369, the RTD temperature displayed by the Relay is zero, thencheck for the following conditions:

1. Shorted RTD

2. RTD hot and compensation leads are reversed, i.e. hot lead in compensation terminal andcompensation lead in hot terminal

• RS485 Communications Port

The 369 can provide direct or remote communications (via a modem). An RS232 to RS485 converter isused to tie it to a PC/PLC or DCS system. The 369 uses the Modicon MODBUS® RTU protocol (functions03, 04, & 16) to interface with PC's, PLC's and DCS systems.

RS485 communications was chosen to be used with the 369 because it allows communications over longdistances of up to 4000 ft. However, care must be taken for it to operate properly and trouble free. The rec-ommendations listed below must be followed to obtain reliable communications:

a) A twisted, shielded pair (preferably a 24 gage Belden 9841 type or 120 equivalent) must be used, androuted away from power carrying cables, such as power supply and CT cables.

b) No more than 32 devices can co-exist on the same link. If however, more than 32 devices should bedaisy chained together, a REPEATER must be used. Note that a repeater is just another RS232 toRS485 converter device. The shields of all 369 units should also be daisy chained together andgrounded at the MASTER (PC/PLC) only. This is due to the fact that if shields are grounded at differentpoints, a potential difference between grounds might exist, resulting in placing one or more of thetransceiver chips (chip used for communications) in an unknown state, i.e. not receiving nor sending,and the corresponding 369 communications might be erroneous, intermittent or unsuccessful.

c) Two sets of 120Ω/0.5W resistor and 1nF/50V capacitor in series must be used (value matches thecharacteristic impedance of the line). One set at the 369 end, connected between the positive andnegative terminals (#46 & #47 on 369) and the second at the other end of the communications link.This is to prevent reflections and ringing on the line. If a different value resistor is used, it runs the riskof over loading the line and communications might be erroneous, intermittent or totally unsuccessful.

d) It is highly recommended that connection from the 369 communication terminals be made directly tothe interfacing Master Device (PC/PLC/DCS), without the use of stub lengths and/or terminal blocks.This is also to minimize ringing and reflections on the line.


7.3 369 DOs and DON’Ts 7 APPLICATIONS

7

b) DON'Ts

• Grounding of the RTD's should not be done in two places

When grounding at the 369, only one Return lead need be grounded as all are hardwired together inter-nally. No error will be introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner.

Running more than one RTD Return lead back will cause significant errors as two or more parallel pathsfor return have been created.

• Apply direct voltage to the Digital Inputs

There are 6 switch inputs (Spare Input; Differential Input; Speed Switch; Access; Emergency Restart;External Reset) that are designed for dry contact connections only. By applying direct voltage to the inputs,it may result in component damage to the digital input circuitry.

• Reset an 86 Lockout switch before resetting the 369

If an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369 make sure that the 369 is reset prior toattempting to reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped it will immediately retrip the lockout switch.Also if the lockout switch is held reset the high current draw of the lockout switch coil may cause damageto itself and/or the 369 output relay.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION

7

7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION

a) 369 CT Withstand

Withstand is important when the phase or ground CT has the capability of driving a large amount of current intothe interposing CTs in the relay. This typically occurs on retrofit installations when the CTs are not sized to theburden of the relay. Electronic relays typically have low burdens (8 mΩ for 369), while the older electromechan-ical relays have typically high burdens (1 Ω).

For high current ground faults, the system will be either low resistance or solidly grounded. The limiting factorthat determines the amount of ground fault current that can flow in these types of systems is the capacity of thesource. Withstand is not important for ground fault on high resistance grounded systems. On these systems, aresistor makes the connection from source to ground at the source (generator, transformer). The resistor valueis chosen such that in the event of a ground fault, the current that flows is limited to a low value, typically 5, 10,or 20 Amps.

Since the potential for very large faults exists (ground faults on high resistance grounded systems excluded),the fault must be cleared as quickly as possible. It is therefore recommended that the time delay for short cir-cuit and high ground faults be set to instantaneous. Then, the duration for which the 369 CTs subjected to highwithstand will be less than 250ms (369 reaction time is less than 50ms + breaker clearing time).

NOTE: Care must be taken to ensure that the interrupting device is capable of interrupting the poten-tial fault. If not, some other method of interrupting the fault should be used, and the feature inquestion should be disabled (e.g. a fused contactor relies on fuses to interrupt large faults).

The 369 CTs were subjected to high currents for 1s bursts. The CTs were capable of handling 500A. 500Arelates to a 100 times the CT primary rating. If the time duration required is less than 1s, the withstand level willincrease.

b) CT Size and Saturation

The rating (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1) for relaying class CTs may be given in a format such as: 2.5C100,10T200, T1OO, 10C50, or C200. The number preceding the letter represents the maximum ratio correction; nonumber in this position implies that the CT accuracy remains within a 10% ratio correction from 0 to 20 timesrating.

The letter is an indication of the CT type:

• A 'C' (formerly L) represents a CT with a low leakage flux in the core where there is no appreciable effecton the ratio when used within the limits dictated by the class and rating. The 'C' stands for calculated; theactual ratio correction should be different from the calculated ratio correction by no more than 1%. A 'C'type CT is typically a bushing, window, or bar type CT with uniformly distributed windings.

• A 'T' (formerly H) represents a CT with a high leakage flux in the core where there is significant effect onCT performance. The 'T' stands for test; since the ratio correction is unpredictable, it is to be determined bytest. A 'T' type CT is typically primary wound with unevenly distributed windings. The subsequent numberspecifies the secondary terminal voltage that may be delivered by the full winding at 20 times rated sec-ondary current without exceeding the ratio correction specified by the first number of the rating. (Example:a 10C100 can develop 100V at 2φx5A, therefore an appropriate external burden would be 1Ω or less toallow 20 times rated secondary current with less than 10% ratio correction.) Note that the voltage rating isat the secondary terminals of the CT and the internal voltage drop across the secondary resistance mustbe accounted for in the design of the CT. There are seven voltage ratings: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, and800. If a CT comes close to a higher rating, but does not meet or exceed it, then the CT must be rated tothe lower value.


7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7 APPLICATIONS

7

In order to determine how much current CTs can output, the secondary resistance of the CT is required. Thisresistance will be part of the equation as far as limiting the current flow. This is determined by the maximumvoltage that may be developed by the CT secondary divided by the entire secondary resistance, CT secondaryresistance included.

7.4.2 CT SELECTION

The 369 phase CT should be chosen such that the FLA (FLC) of the motor falls within 50 to 100% of the CTprimary rating. For example, if the FLA of the motor is 173A, a primary CT rating of 200, 250, or 300 can bechosen (200 being the better choice). This provides maximum protection of the motor.

The CT selected must then be checked to ensure that it can drive the attached burden (relay and wiring andany auxiliary devices) at maximum fault current levels without saturating. There are essentially two ways ofdetermining if the CT is being driven into saturation:

1. Use CT secondary resistance.

Burden = CTsecondary resistance + Wireresistance + Relayburden resistance

CT secondary voltage = Burden x (Ifault maximum / CTratio)

Example:

Maximum fault level = 6kA

369 burden = 0.008Ω

CT = 300:5

CTsecondary resistance = 0.088Ω

Wire length (1 lead) = 50m

Wire Size = 4.00mm2

Ohms/km = 4.73Ω

∴Burden = 0.088 + (2x50)(4.73/1000) + 0.008

= 0.569Ω

∴CT secondary voltage = 0.569 x (6000 / (300/5))

= 56.9V

Using the excitation curves for the 300:5 CT we see that the knee voltage is at 60V,

therefore this CT is acceptable for this application.

2. Use CT class.

Burden = Wireresistance + Relayburden resistance

CT secondary voltage = Burden x (Ifault maximum / CTratio)


7 APPLICATIONS 7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION

7

Example:

From the CT class (C20): The amount of secondary voltage the CT can deliver to the load burden at20xCT without exceeding the 10% ratio error is 20V.

This application calls for 6000/300 = 20xCT (Fault current / CT primary)

Thus the 10% ratio error may be exceeded.

The number in the CT class code refers to the guaranteed secondary voltage of the CT. Therefore, themaximum current that the CT can deliver can be calculated as follows:

maximum secondary current = CT class / Burden

= 20 / 0.481

= 41.58A

Figure 7–1: EQUIVALENT CT CIRCUIT

Maximum fault level = 6kA

369 burden = 0.008ΩCT = 300:5

CT class = C20

Wire length (1 lead) = 50m

Wire Size = 4.00mm2

Ohms/km = 4.73Ω∴Burden = (2x50)(4.73/1000) + 0.008

= 0.481Ω∴CT secondary voltage = 0.481 x (6000 / (300/5))

= 48.1V


7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

The amount of information from a motor manufacturer can vary from nameplate information to a vast amount ofdata related to every parameter of the motor. Table 7–2: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICALMOTOR DATA SHEET, shows selected information from a typical motor data sheet and Figure 7–2: MOTORTHERMAL LIMITS, shows the related motor thermal limit curves. This information is required to set the 369 fora proper protection scheme.

The following is a example of how to determine the 369 setpoints. It is only a example and the setpointsshould be determined based on the application and specific design of the motor.

Table 7–2: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEET

Driven equipment Reciprocating Compressor

Ambient Temperature min. -20oC max. 41oC

Type or Motor Synchronous

Voltage 6000 V

Nameplate power 2300 kW

Service Factor 1

Insulation class F

Temperature rise stator / rotor 79 / 79 K

Max. locked rotor current 550% FLC

Locked rotor current% FLC 500% @ 100% Voltage / 425% @ 85% Voltage

Starting time 4 seconds @ 100% Voltage / 6.5 seconds @ 85% Voltage

Max. permissible starts cold / warm 3 / 2

Rated Load Current 229A @ 100% Load


7 APPLICATIONS 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

7

Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS

Phase CT

The phase CT should be chosen such that the FLC is 50% to 100% of CT primary. Since the FLC is 229A a250:5, 300:5, or 400:5 CT may be chosen (a 250:5 is the better choice).

229 / 0.50 = 458

OR

229 / 1.00 = 229



7

Motor FLC

Set the Motor Full Load Current to 229A, as per data sheets.

Ground CT

For high resistive grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidlygrounded or low resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher, a 1A or 5A CT should beused. If residual ground fault connection is to be used, the ground fault CT ratio most equal the phase CT ratio.The zero sequence CT chosen needs to be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.

VT Settings

The motor is going to be connected in Wye, hence, the VT connection type will be programmed as Wye. Sincethe motor voltage is 4000V, the VT being used will be 4000:120. The VT ratio to be programmed into the 369will then be 33.33:1 (4000/120) and the Motor Rated Voltage will be programmed to 4000V, as per the motordata sheets.

Overload Pickup

The overload pickup is set to the same as the service factor of the motor. In this case, it would be set to thelowest setting of 1.05 x FLC for the service factor of 1.

Unbalance Bias Of Thermal Capacity

Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added tothe Thermal Capacity Used.

Unbalance Bias K Factor

The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due tounbalance. It is defined as:

Rr2 / Rr1

where:

Rr2 = rotor neg. sequence resistance

Rr1 = rotor positive sequence resistance

where:

LRA = Locked Rotor Current

Note: Above formula is based on imperial data

The 369 has the ability to learn the K value after five successful starts. After 5 starts, turn this setpoint off sothat the 369 uses the learned value

K 175

LRA2

-------------175

5.52

--------- 6≅= =



7

Hot/Cold Curve Ratio

The hot/cold curve ratio is calculated by simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. In thisexample, the only one stall time is shown, therefore set the hot/cold ratio to zero.

Running Cool Time

The running cool time is the time required for the motor to cool while running. This information is usually sup-plied by the motor manufacturer but is not part of the data that was given. Refer to the Selection of Cool Timeapplication note for more details on how to determine this value.

Stopped Cool Time

The stopped cool time is the time required for the motor to cool when stopped. This time is supplied by themotor manufacturer but is not part of the information sent. Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application notefor more details on how to determine this value.

Note: Motors have a fanning action when running due to the rotation of the rotor. For this reason, the runningcool time is typically half of the stopped cool time.

Enable RTD Biasing

This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors, to be included in the calculations of ThermalCapacity. This model determines the Thermal Capacity Used based on the temperature of the Stators and isseparate from the overload model for calculating Thermal Capacity Used. RTD biasing is a back up protectionelement which accounts for such things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature.

RTD Bias Minimum

Set to 40°C which is the ambient temperature (obtained from data sheets).

RTD Bias Mid Point

The center point temperature is set to the motor’s hot running temperature and is calculated as follows:

Temperature Rise of Stator + Ambient Temperature.

The temperature rise of the stator is 79°K, obtained from the data sheets. Therefore, the RTD Center point tem-perature is set to 120°C (79 + 40).

RTD Bias Maximum

This setpoint is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less. A class F insulation is used in this motor whichis rated at 155°C.

Overload Curve

The overload curve to be chosen should be just below the cold thermal limit and above the hot thermal limit.The best fitting curve seems to be curve 4, as seen in Figure 7–2:, MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS, on page 11.



7

Short Circuit Trip

The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit currentof the fuses. The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 550% FLC or 5.5 x FLC. A setting of6 x FLC with a instantaneous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to the asymmetricalstarting currents. If asymmetrical starting currents limits the starting capability, set the S/C level higher to amaximum of 10 x FLC to override this condition (1.7x5.5=9.35 where 1.7 is the maximum DC offset for anasymmetrical current).

Mechanical Jam

If the process causes the motor to be prone to mechanical jams, set the Mechanical Jam Trip and Alarmaccordingly. In most cases, the overload trip will become active before the Mechanical Trip, however, if a highoverload curve is chosen, the Mechanical Jam level and time delay become more critical. The setting shouldthen be set to below the overload curve but above any normal overload conditions of the motor.

Undercurrent

If detection of loss of load is required for the specific application, set the undercurrent element according to thecurrent that will indicate loss of load.

Unbalance Alarm and Trip

The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design. In this case, themotor being protected is a reciprocating compressor, in which unbalance will be a normal running condition,thus this setting should be set high. The heating effect of unbalance will be protected by enabling unbalanceinput to thermal memory; described latter. A setting of 20% for the Unbalance Alarm with a delay of 10 secondswould be appreciate and the trip can be set to 25% with a delay of 10 seconds

Ground Fault

Unfortunately, there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting. These settings depend onthe following information:

1. The Ground Fault current available.

2. System Grounding - high resistive grounding, solidly grounded, etc.

3. Ground Fault CT used.

4. Ground Fault connection - zero sequence or Residual connection.

Acceleration Trip

This setpoint should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltageis lower or for varying loads during acceleration. If reduced voltage starting is used, a setting of 8 secondswould be appropriate, or if direct across the line starting is used, a setting of 5 seconds could be used.

Enable Start Inhibit

This function will limit starts when the motor is already hot. The 369 learns the amount of thermal capacity usedat start. If the motor is hot, thus having some thermal capacity, the 369 will not allow a start if the available ther-mal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start.



7

Starts/Hour

Starts/Hour can be set to the # of cold starts as per the data sheet. For this example, the starts/hour would beset to 3.

Time Between Starts

In some cases, the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts. In this example, this infor-mation is not given so this feature can be turned “Off”. However, if the information is given, the time providedon the motor data sheets should be programmed.

Stator RTDs

RTD trip level should be set at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation. This example has aclass F insulation which has a temperature rating of 155°C, therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set tobetween 140°C to 155°C. The RTD alarm level should be set to a level to provide a warning that the motor tem-perature is rising. For this example, 120°C or 130°C would be appropriate.

Bearing RTDs

The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification fromthe bearing manufacturer.


7.6 APPLICATIONS 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.6 APPLICATIONS 7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION

The 369 detects a stopped motor condition when the phase current falls below 5% of CT, and detects a startingmotor condition when phase current is sensed after a stopped motor condition. If the motor idles at 5% of CT,several starts and stops can be detected causing nuisance lockouts if Starts/Hour, Time Between Starts,Restart Block, or Backspin Timer are programmed. As well, the learned values, such as the Learned StartingThermal Capacity, Learned Starting Current and Learned Acceleration time can be incorrectly calculated.

To overcome this potential problem, the Spare Digital Input can be configured to read the status of the breakerand determine whether the motor is stopped or simply idling. With the spare input configured as Starter Statusand the breaker auxiliary contacts wired across the spare input terminals, the 369 senses a stopped motor con-dition only when the phase current is below 5% of CT (or zero) AND the breaker is open. If both of these con-ditions are not met, the 369 will continue to operate as if the motor is running and the starting elements remainunchanged. Refer to Figure 7–3:, FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED, onpage 17, for more details of how the 369 detects motor status and how the starter status element furtherdefines the condition of the motor.

When the Starter Status is programmed, the type of breaker contact being used for monitoring must be set.The following is the states of the breaker auxiliary contacts in relation to the breaker:

• 52a, 52aa - open when the breaker contacts are open and closed when the breaker contacts are closed

• 52b, 52bb - closed when the breaker contacts are open and open when the breaker contacts are closed


7 APPLICATIONS 7.6 APPLICATIONS

7

Figure 7–3: FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED



7

7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS

Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermalmodel. The definition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and quite often, informa-tion is not available. Therefore, it is important to remember what the goal of the motor protection thermal mod-eling is: to thermally protect the motor (rotor and stator) without impeding the normal and expected operatingconditions that the motor will be subject to.

The thermal model of the 369 provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection. If cooling time constantsare supplied with the motor data they should be used. Since the rotor and stator heating and cooling is inte-grated into a single model, use the longer of the cooling time constants (rotor or stator).

If however, no cooling time constants are provided, settings will have to be determined. Before determining thecool time constant settings, the duty cycle of the motor should be considered. If the motor is typically started upand run continuously for very long periods of time with no overload duty requirements, the cooling time con-stants can be large. This would make the thermal model conservative. If the normal duty cycle of the motorinvolves frequent starts and stops with a periodic overload duty requirement, the cooling time constants willneed to be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor.

Normally motors are rotor limited during starting. Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method ofdetermining cool times. Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constantscan be accomplished in one of the following manners listed in order of preference.

1. The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or bythe manufacturer if requested. Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are onefifth the total time to go from 100% thermal capacity used to 0%.

2. Attempt to determine a conservative value from available data on the motor. See the following example fordetails.

3. If no data is available an educated guess must be made. Perhaps the motor data could be estimated fromother motors of a similar size or use. Note that conservative protection is better as a first choice until a bet-ter understanding of the motor requirements is developed. Remember that the goal is to protect the motorwithout impeding the operating duty that is desired.

Example:

Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is 2 cold or 1 hot after which you must wait 5 hoursbefore attempting another start.

• This implies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 50% thermal capacity.Hence, two consecutive starts are allowed, but not three.

• If the hot and cold curves or a hot/cold safe stall ratio are not available program 0.5 (1hot/2cold starts) in asthe hot/cold ratio.

• Programming Start Inhibit ‘On’ makes a restart possible as soon as 62.5% (50x1.25) thermal capacity isavailable.

• After 2 cold or 1 hot start, close to 100% thermal capacity will be used. Thermal capacity used decaysexponentially (see 369 manual section on motor cooling for calculation). There will be only 37% thermalcapacity used after 1 time constant which means there is enough thermal capacity available for anotherstart. Program 300 minutes (5 hours) as the stopped cool time constant. Thus after 2 cold or 1 hot start, astopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5 hours.

Since the rotor cools faster when the motor is running, a reasonable setting for the running cool time constantmight be half the stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes.



7

7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL

Figure 7–4: THERMAL MODEL BLOCK DIAGRAM

LEGENDU/B..........................UnbalanceI/P ...........................InputIavg.........................Average Three Phase CurrentIeq...........................Equivalent Average Three Phase CurrentIp.............................Positive Sequence CurrentIn.............................Negative Sequence CurrentK .............................Constant Multiplier that Equates In to IpFLC.........................Full Load CurrentFLC TCR ................FLC Thermal Capacity Reduction SetpointTC...........................Thermal Capacity usedRTD BIAS TC .........TC Value looked up from RTD Bias Curve

NOTE: If Unbalance input to thermal memory is enabled, the increase in heating is reflected in thethermal model. If RTD Input to Thermal Memory is enabled, the feed-back from the RTDs willcorrect the thermal model.



7

7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE

Figure 7–5: RTD BIAS FEATURE

LEGEND

Tmax ................... RTD Bias Maximum Temperature ValueTmin .................... RTD Bias Minimum Temperature ValueHottest RTD ........ Hottest Stator RTD measuredTC ....................... Thermal Capacity UsedTC RTD ............... Thermal Capacity Looked up on RTD Bias Curve.TC Model ............ Thermal Capacity based on the Thermal Model

START

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

RTD BIASENABLED ?

HOTTESTSTATOR RTD

> Tmax

HOTTESTSTATOR RTD

<Tmin

T.C. RTD >T.C. THERMAL

MODEL

T.C. = T.C. RTD T.C. = T.C. MODEL

T.C. = T.C. RTD =100%

OVERLOAD ?

T.C. MODEL =100%

END

Tmin < HOTTESTSTATOR RTD < Tmax(T.C. LOOKED UP ON

RTD BIAS CURVE)

840739A1.CDR

TRIP



7

7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION

The overload element uses a Thermal Capacity algorithm to determine an overload trip condition. The extent ofoverload current determines how fast the Thermal Memory is filled, i.e. if the current is just over FLC X O/LPickup, Thermal Capacity slowly increases; versus if the current far exceeds the FLC pickup level, the ThermalCapacity rapidly increases. An overload trip occurs when the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 100%.

The overload current does not necessarily have to pass the overload curve for a trip to take place. If there isThermal Capacity already built up, the overload trip will occur much faster. In other words, the overload trip willoccur at the specified time on the curve only when the Thermal Capacity is equal to zero and the current isapplied at a stable rate. Otherwise, the Thermal Capacity increases from the value prior to overload, until a100% Thermal Capacity is reached and an overload trip occurs.

It is important to chose the overload curve correctly for proper protection. In some cases it is necessary to cal-culate the amount of Thermal Capacity developed after a start. This is done to ensure that the 369 does not tripthe motor prior to the completion of a start. The actual filling of the Thermal Capacity is the area under theoverload current curve. Therefore, to calculate the amount of Thermal Capacity after a start, the integral of theoverload current most be calculated. Below is an example of how to calculate the Thermal Capacity during astart:

Thermal Capacity Calculation:

1. Draw lines intersecting the acceleration curve and the overload curve. This is illustrated in Figure 7–6:,THERMAL LIMIT CURVES, on page 22.

2. Determine the time at which the drawn line intersect, the acceleration curve and the time at which thedrawn line intersects the chosen overload curve.

3. Integrate the values that have been determined.

Therefore, after this motor has completed a successful start, the Thermal Capacity would have reachedapproximately 40%.

Table 7–3: THERMAL CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

Time Period(seconds)

Motor Starting Current(% of FLC

Custom Curve TripTime (seconds)

Total Accumulated ThermalCapacity Used (%)

0 to 3 580 38 3/38 x 100 = 7.8%

3 to 6 560 41 (3/41 x 100) + 7.8% = 15.1%

6 to 9 540 44 (3/44 x 100) + 15.1% = 21.9%

9 to 12 520 47 (3/47 x 100) + 21.9% = 28.3%

12 to 14 500 51 (2/51 x 100) + 28.3% = 32.2%

14 to 15 480 56 (1/56 x 100) + 32.2% = 34.0%

15 to 16 460 61 (1/61 x 100) + 34.0% = 35.6%

16 to 17 440 67 (1/67 x 100) + 35.6% = 37.1%

17 to 18 380 90 (1/90 x 100) + 37.1% = 38.2%

18 to 19 300 149 (1/149 x 100) + 38.2% = 38.9%

19 to 20 160 670 (1/670 x 100) + 38.9% = 39.0%



7

Figure 7–6: THERMAL LIMIT CURVES

Thermal limit curves illustrate thermal capacity used calculation during a start.



7

7.6.6 START INHIBIT

The Start Inhibit element of the 369 provides an accurate and reliable start protection without unnecessary pro-longed lockout times causing production down time. The lockout time is based on the actual performance andapplication of the motor and not on the worst case scenario, as other start protection elements.

The 369 Thermal Capacity algorithm is used to establish the lockout time of the Start Inhibit element. ThermalCapacity is a percentage value that gives an indication of how hot the motor is and is derived from the overloadcurrents (as well as Unbalance currents and RTDs if the respective biasing functions are enabled). The easiestway to understand the Thermal Modeling function of the 369 is to image a bucket that holds Thermal Capacity.Once this imaginary bucket is full, an overload trip occurs. The bucket is filled by the amount of overload cur-rent integrated over time and is compared to the programmed overload curve to obtain a percentage value.The thermal capacity bucket is emptied based on the programmed running cool time when the current hasfallen below the Full Load Current (FLC) and is running normally.

Upon a start, the inrush current is very high, causing the thermal capacity to rapidly increase. The ThermalCapacity Used variable is compared to the amount of the Thermal Capacity required to start the motor. If thereis not enough thermal capacity available to start the motor, the 369 blocks the operator from starting until themotor has cooled to a level of thermal capacity to successfully start.

Assume that a motor requires 40% Thermal Capacity to start. If the motor was running in overload prior tostopping, the thermal capacity would be some value; say 80%. Under such conditions the 369 (with Start Inhibitenabled) will lockout or prevent the operator from starting the motor until the thermal capacity has decreased to60% so that a successful motor start can be achieved. This example is illustrated in Figure 7–7:, ILLUSTRA-TION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY, on page 24.

The lockout time is calculated as follows:

where:

The setpoint, ‘Initial Start capacity’ provides a value to be used in replace of the TC_learned value until therelay has observed the five successful starts and can determine a learned value. After the initial five starts, the‘Initial Start Capacity’ setpoint is ignored and learned value is automatically used. The learned start capacity isthen updated every four starts. A safe margin is built into the calculation of the ‘Learned Start CapacityRequired’ to ensure successful completion of the longest and most demanding starts. The Learned StartCapacity is calculated as follows:

TC_used = Thermal Capacity Used

TC_learned = Learned Thermal Capacity required to start

stopped_cool_time = one of two variables will be used:

1. Learned cool time is enabled, or

2. Programmed stopped cool time

lockout_time stopped_cool_time_constantTC_used

100 TC_learned–-------------------------------------------

ln×=



7

where:

Start_TC1 = the thermal capacity required for the first start

Start_TC2 = the thermal capacity required for the second start

etc.

Figure 7–7: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY

Learned Start CapacityStart TC Start TC Start TC Start TC Start TC

_ __ _ _ _ _=

+ + + +1 2 3 4 54



7

7.6.7 2φ CT CONFIGURATION

The purpose of this Appendix is to illustrate how two CT’s may be used to sense three phase currents.

The proper configuration for the use of two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown. Each of thetwo CTs acts as a current source. The current that comes out of the CT on phase ‘A’ flows into the interposingCT on the relay marked ‘A’. From there, the current sums with the current that is flowing from the CT on phase‘C’ which has just passed through the interposing CT on the relay marked ‘C’. This ‘summed’ current flowsthrough the interposing CT marked ‘B’ and from there, the current splits up to return to its respective source(CT). Polarity is very important since the value of phase ‘B’ must be the negative equivalent of 'A' + 'C'in order for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero. Note, there is only one ground connection asshown. If two ground connections are made, a parallel path for current has been created.

Figure 7–8: TWO PHASE WIRING

In the two CT configuration, the currents will sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs. The diagramillustrates the two possible configurations. If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1.73 on a system that isknown to be balanced, simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs (taking care that theCTs are still tied to ground at some point). Polarity is important.

Figure 7–9: VECTORS SHOWING REVERSE POLARITY



7

To illustrate the point further, the diagram here shows how the current in phases 'A' and 'C' sum up to createphase 'B'.

Figure 7–10: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - CORRECTLY WIRED 2 φ CT SYSTEM

Once again, if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180° , the magnitude of the resulting vector on a bal-anced system will be out by a factor of 1.73.

Figure 7–11: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT - INCORRECTLY WIRED 2 φ CT SYSTEM

On a three wire supply, this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly. In the eventof a single phase, there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay. If forexample phase ‘A’ was lost, phase ‘A’ would read zero while phases ‘B’ and ‘C’ would both read the magnitudeof phase ‘C’. If on the other hand, phase ‘B’ was lost, at the supply, ‘A’ would be 180° out of phase with phase‘C’ and the vector addition would equal zero at phase ‘B’.



7

7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS

The 50:0.025 ground fault input of the 369 is designed for sensitive detection of faults on a high resistancegrounded system. Detection of ground currents from 1-10 amps primary translates to an input of 0.5mA to 5mAinto the 50:0.025 tap. Understanding this allows the use of this input in a simple manner for the detection ofground faults on ungrounded systems.

Figure 7–12: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS, illustrates how a wye - opendelta voltage transformer configuration may be used to detect the grounding of a phase. Under normal condi-tions, the net voltage of the three phases that appears across the 50:0.025 input and the resistor is close tozero. Under a fault condition, assuming the secondaries of the VTs to be 69 V, the net voltage seen by the relayand the resistor is 3Vo or (3 x 69) 207V.

Figure 7–12: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS

Since the wire resistance should be relatively small in comparison to the resistor chosen, the current that flowswill be a function of the fault voltage that is seen on the open delta divided by the resistor value chosen plus theburden of the 369 50:0.025 input (1200Ω).

For Example:

If a pickup range of 10 - 100 V is desired, the resistor should be chosen as follows:

1. 1-10 A pickup on the 2000:1 tap = 0.5mA - 5mA.

2. 10V/0.5mA = 20kΩ.

3. If the resistor chosen is 20kΩ - 1.2kΩ= 18.8kΩ, the wattage should be greater than:



7

E²/R, approximately

= (207V)²/18.8kΩ

= 2.28W, a 5W resistor will suffice.

Note: The VTs must have a primary rating equal or greater than the line to line voltage, asthis is the voltage that will be seen by the unfaulted inputs in the event of a fault.



7

7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY

The following is an explanation of how the RTD circuitry works in the 369 Motor Protection Relays.

Figure 7–13: RTD CIRCUITRY

A constant current source sends 3mA DC down legs A and C. 6mA DC returns down leg B. It may be seenthat:

VAB = VLead A + VLead B and VBC = VLead C + VRTD + VLead B

or

VAB = VCOMP + VRETURN and VBC = VHOT + VRTD + VRETURN

The above holds true providing that all three leads are the same length, gage, and material, hence the sameresistance.

RLead A = RLead B= RLead C= RLead

or

RHOT = RCOMP = RRETURN = RLead

Electronically, subtracting VAB from VBC leaves only the voltage across the RTD. In this manner lead length iseffectively negated:

VBC - VAB = VLead + VRTD + VLead - VLead + VLead

VBC - VAB = VRTD



7

7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION

The 369 requires three leads to be brought back from each RTD: Hot, Return and Compensation. This can bequite expensive. It is however possible to reduce the number of leads required to 3 for the first RTD and 1 foreach successive RTD. Refer to Figure 7–14: REDUCED WIRING RTDs, for wiring configuration for this appli-cation.

Figure 7–14: REDUCED WIRING RTDs

The Hot line for each RTD would have to be run as usual for each RTD. The Compensation and Return leadshowever, need only be run for the first RTD. At the motor RTD terminal box, the RTD Return leads must bejumpered together with as short as possible jumpers. At the 369 relay, the Compensation leads must be jum-pered together.



7

It can be noted that there is an error produced on each RTD equal to the voltage drop across the jumper on theRTD return. This error would increase on each successive RTD added.

VRTD1 = VRTD1

VRTD2 = VRTD2 + VJ3

VRTD3 = VRTD3 + VJ3 + VJ4

VRTD4 = VRTD4 + VJ3+ VJ4 + VJ5

etc....

This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the wire used for the jumpers and any error intro-duced by a poor connection. For RTD types other than 10C, the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible.

This RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring, however, the following disadvantages must be noted:

1. Error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances. Not recommended for 10C RTDs.

2. If the RTD Return lead to the 369 or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the breakonwards will read open.

3. If the Compensation lead breaks or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the breakonwards will function without any lead compensation.



7

7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION

An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD may be seen in Figure 7–15: 2 WIRE RTDLEAD COMPENSATION.

Figure 7–15: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION

The compensation lead would be added and it would compensate for the Hot and the Return assuming theyare all of equal length and gauge. To compensate for resistance of the Hot and Compensation leads, a resistorequal to the resistance of the Hot lead could be added to the compensation lead, though in many cases this isunnecessary.



7

7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING

Figure 7–16: AUTO TRANSFORMER, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CIRCUIT


8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP

8

8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this testing description is to demonstrate the procedures necessary to perform a completefunctional test of all the 369 hardware while also testing firmware/hardware interaction in the process. Testingof the relay during commissioning using a primary injection test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correctand complete.

8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP

Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP


8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING

8

8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for phase current accuracy is ±0.5% of 2xCT when the injected current is < 2xCT. Per-form the steps below to verify accuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoint:

SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000A

2. Measured values should be within ±10A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below and verifyaccuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERING

8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for voltage input accuracy is ±0.5% of full scale(273V). Perform the steps below to verifyaccuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoints:

SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: WyeSETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO: 10

2. Measured values should be within ±24V of expected. Apply the voltage values shown in the table and ver-ify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\VOLTAGE METERING

INJECTEDCURRENT 1 A

UNIT(A)

INJECTEDCURRENT 5 A

UNIT(A)

EXPECTEDCURRENTREADING

(A)

MEASUREDCURRENTPHASE A

(A)

MEASUREDCURRENTPHASE B

(A)

MEASUREDCURRENTPHASE C

(A)0.1 0.5 100

0.2 1.0 200

0.5 2.5 500

1 5 1000

1.5 7.5 1500

2 10 2000

APPLIEDLINE-NEUTRAL

VOLTAGE(V)

EXPECTEDVOLTAGEREADING

(V)

MEASUREDVOLTAGE

A-N(V)

MEASUREDVOLTAGE

B-N(V)

MEASUREDVOLTAGE

C-N(V)

30 300

50 500

100 1000

150 1500

200 2000

240 2400


8 TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8

8.2.3 GROUND (1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for the 1A/5A ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of 1xCT for the 5A input and 0.5%of 5xCT for the 1A input. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.

5A INPUT


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE : 5A SecondarySETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A

2. Measured values should be ±5A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verifyaccuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:


1A INPUT


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: 1A SecondarySETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A

2. Measured values should be ±25A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and ver-ify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:


INJECTEDCURRENT5 A UNIT

(A)


(A)

MEASUREDGROUNDCURRENT

(A)0.5 100

1.0 200

2.5 500

5 1000


(A)


(A)


(A)0.1 100

0.2 200

0.5 500

1 1000



8

8.2.4 MULTILIN 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for Multilin 50:0.025 ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of CT rated primary (25A).Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoint:

SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ GROUND CT TYPE: MULTILIN 50:0.025

2. Measured values should be within±0.125A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below eitheras primary values into a Multilin 50:0.025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate the corebalance CT. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:


8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for RTD input accuracy is ±2° . Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.


SETPOINT S8:RTD TEMPERATURE \ RTD TYPE \ STATOR RTD TYPE: 100 ohm Platinum(select desired type)

2. Measured values should be ±2° C or ±4° F. Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the tablebelow to simulate RTDs and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\ LOCAL RTD ( and / or REMOTE RTD if using the RRTD Module)

3. Select the preferred temperature units for the display. Alter the following setpoint:

SETPOINT S1: 369 SETUP \ DISPLAY PREFERENCES \ TEMPERATURE DISPLAY : Celsius ( or Fahrenheit ifpreferred)

4. Repeat the above measurements for the other RTD types. ( 120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Nickel and 10 OhmCopper ).

PRIMARY INJECTEDCURRENT

50:0.025 CT(A)

SECONDARYINJECTED CURRENT

(mA)


(A)


(A)0.25 0.125 0.25

1 0.5 1.00

10 5 10.00

25 12.5 25.00



8

APPLIEDRESISTANCE

100 OHMPLATINUM

(ohm)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° C)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° F)

MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE

SELECT ONE____( ° C )____( ° F )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1280.31 -50 -58

100.00 0 32

119.39 50 122

138.50 100 212

157.32 150 302

175.84 200 392

194.08 250 482

APPLIEDRESISTANCE

120 OHMNICKEL(ohm)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° C)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° F)


SELECT ONE____( ° C )____( ° F )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1286.17 -50 -58

120.00 0 32

157.74 50 122

200.64 100 212

248.95 150 302

303.46 200 392

366.53 250 482

APPLIEDRESISTANCE

100 OHMNICKEL(ohm)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° C)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° F)


SELECT ONE____( ° C )____( ° F )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1271.81 -50 -58

100.00 0 32

131.45 50 122

167.20 100 212

207.45 150 302

252.88 200 392

305.44 250 482



8

APPLIEDRESISTANCE

10 OHMCOPPER

(ohm)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° C)

EXPECTEDRTD

TEMPERATUREREADING

(° F)


SELECT ONE____( ° C )____( ° F )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 127.10 -50 -58

9.04 0 32

10.97 50 122

12.90 100 212

14.83 150 302

16.78 200 392

18.73 250 482



8

8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION

The digital inputs and trip coil supervision can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton. Performthe steps below to verify functionality of the digital inputs.

1. Open switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit.

2. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in:

ACTUAL VALUES A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

3. Close switches of all of the digital inputs and the trip coil supervision circuit.

4. View the status of the digital inputs and trip coil supervision in:

ACTUAL VALUES A1: \ STATUS \ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

INPUTEXPECTED

STATUS(SWITCH OPEN)

PASS FAIL

EXPECTEDSTATUS

(SWITCH CLOSED)

PASS FAIL

SPARE Open Shorted

DIFFERENTIAL RELAY Open Shorted

SPEED SWITCH Open Shorted

ACCESS SWITCH Open Shorted

EMERGENCY RESTART Open Shorted

EXTERNAL RESET Open Shorted



8

8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

The 369 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is ±1% of full scale. Perform the steps belowto verify accuracy.

4-20mA


SETPOINT S10:ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG RANGE: 4-20 mA

(repeat for analog inputs 2-4)

2. Analog output values should be ±0.2mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following set-points:

SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS \ FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 : 0%

(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2-4)

3. Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs

4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.

0-1mA


SETPOINT S10:ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG RANGE: 0-1 mA(repeat for analog inputs 2-4)

2. Analog output values should be ±0.01mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the followingsetpoints:

SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS \ FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 : 0%(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2-4)


4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings

ANALOG OUTPUTFORCE VALUE

EXPECTEDAMMETER READING

(mA)

MEASUREDAMMETERREADING

(mA)1 2 3 4

0 4

25 8

50 12

75 16

100 20



8

.

0-20mA


SETPOINT S10:ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 \ ANALOG RANGE: 0-20 mA

(repeat for analog inputs 2-4)

2. Analog output values should be ±0.2mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following set-points:

SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS \ FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 : 0%(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2-4)


4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.

ANALOGOUTPUT

FORCE VALUE

EXPECTED AMMETERREADING

(mA)

MEASURED AMMETERREADING

(mA)1 2 3 4

0 4

25 8

50 12

75 16

100 20

ANALOGOUTPUT

FORCE VALUE

EXPECTED AMMETERREADING

(mA)

MEASURED AMMETERREADING

(mA)1 2 3 4

0 4

25 8

50 12

75 16

100 20



8

8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS

To verify the functionality of the output relays, perform the following steps:

1. Use the following setpoints:

SETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY: EnergizedSETPOINT S11:TESTING\TEST OUTPUT RELAYS\FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: Static

2. Using the above setpoints, individually select each of the other output relays ( AUX 1, AUX 2 and ALARM)and verify operation

.

FORCEOPERATIONSETPOINT

EXPECTED MEASUREMENT for SHORT

ACTUAL MEASUREMENT for SHORT

R1 R2 R3 R4 R1 R2 R3 R4no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc

R1 Trip

R2 Auxiliary

R3 Auxiliary

R4 Alarm


8 TESTING 8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8

8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST

The 369 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is ±100ms or ±2% of time to trip. Pickup accuracy isas per the current inputs (±0.5% of 2xCT when the injected current is < 2xCT and ±1% of 20xCT when theinjected current is ≥ 2xCT). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA: 1000SETPOINT S3:OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ SELECT CURVE STYLE: StandardSETPOINTS3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ OVERLOAD CURVES \ STANDARD OVELOAD CURVE NUMBER : 4SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: 1.10SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: 0SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ HOT / COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: 1.00SETPOINT S3: OVERLOAD PROTECTION \ THERMAL MODEL \ ENABLE RTD BIASING: No

2. Any trip must be reset prior to each test. Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediatelyprior to each overload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero. Failure to do so willresult in shorter trip times. Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown and ver-ify the trip times. Motor load may be viewed in:

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\CURRENT METERINGThermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in:ACTUAL VALUES A1:\STATUS\MOTOR STATUS

8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST

The 369 specification for reactive and apparent power is ± 1.5% of 2xCTxVT full scale @ Iavg <2xCT. Performthe steps below to verify accuracy.


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: WyeSETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT RATIO: 10.00:1

2. Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View themeasured values in:

AVERAGEPHASE

CURRENTDISPLAYED

(A)


(A)

PICKUPLEVEL

EXPECTEDTIME TO TRIP

(s)

TOLERANCERANGE

(s)

MEASURED TIMETO TRIP

(s)

1050 1.05 1.05 never n/a

1200 1.20 1.20 795.44 779.53-811.35

1750 1.75 1.75 169.66 166.27-173.05

3000 3.0 3.00 43.73 42.86-44.60

6000 6.0 6.00 9.99 9.79-10.19

10000 10.0 10.00 5.55 5.44-5.66


8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING

8

ACTUAL VALUES A2:\METERING DATA\POWER METERING

8.3.3 UNBALANCE TEST

The 369 measures the ratio of negative sequence current (l2) to positive sequence current (l1). This value as apercent is used as the unbalanced level when motor load exceeds FLA. When the average phase current isbelow FLA, the unbalanced value is derated to prevent nuisance tripping as positive sequence current is muchsmaller and negative sequence current remains relatively constant. A sample calculation is biven below.

The derating formula is:

Figure 8–2: THREE PHASE EXAMPLE FOR UNBALANCE CALCULATION

INJECTEDCURRENT1A UNIT,

APPLIED VOLTAGE(Ia is reference

vector)

INJECTEDCURRENT5A UNIT,

APPLIED VOLTAGE(Ia is reference

vector)

EXPECTEDLEVEL OF

POWERQUANTITY

TOLERANCERANGE

OF POWERQUANTITY

MEASUREDPOWER

QUANTITY

EXPECTEDPOWERFACTOR

MEASUREDPOWERFACTOR

Ia=1A ∠0°Ib=1A ∠120°Ic=1A ∠240°

Va=120V ∠342°Vb=120V ∠102°Vc=120V ∠222°

Ia=5A ∠0°Ib=5A ∠120°Ic=5A ∠240°

Va=120V ∠342°Vb=120V ∠102°Vc=120V ∠222°

+ 3424 kW 3352-3496kW

0.95 lag

Ia=1A ∠0°Ib=1A ∠120°Ic=1A ∠240°

Va=120V ∠288°Vb=120V ∠48°

Vc=120V ∠168°

Ia=5A ∠0°Ib=5A ∠120°Ic=5A ∠240°

Va=120V ∠288°Vb=120V ∠48°Vc=120V ∠168°

+ 3424 kvar 3352-3496kvar

0.31 lag

I

I

Iavg

FLAx2

1

100%×



8

Symmetrical component analysis of vectors using the mathematic vector convention yields a ratio of negativesequence current to positive sequence current as shown:

The 369 specification for unbalance accuracy is ±2%. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 ASETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ MOTOR FLA: 1000 A

2. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measuredvalues in:


if, FLA=1000

and since, (Iavg =926.7A) < (FLA=1000)

INJECTEDCURRENT

1A UNIT(A)

INJECTEDCURRENT

1A UNIT(A)

EXPECTEDUNBALANCE

LEVEL(%)

MEASUREDUNBALANCE

LEVEL

Ia= 0.78 ∠0°Ib=1 ∠113°Ic=1 ∠226°

Ia= 3.9 ∠0°Ib=5 ∠113°Ic=5 ∠226°

14

Ia=1.56 ∠0°Ib=2 ∠113°Ic=2 ∠226°

Ia=7.8 ∠0°Ib=10 ∠113°Ic=10 ∠226°

15

Ia= 0.39 ∠0°Ib=0.5 ∠113°Ic=0.5 ∠226°

Ia= 1.95 ∠0°Ib=2.5 ∠113°Ic=2.5 ∠226°

7

I

I

Ia a Ib aIc

Ia aIb a Icj2

2

21

1313

1 120 0 5 0 866=+ +

+ +∠ ° = − +

( )

( ). .where a =

I

I2

2

21

780 0 1 120 1000 113 1 120 1000 113

780 0 1 120 1000 113 1 120 1000 113=

∠ °+ ∠ ° ∠ − ° + ∠ ° ∠ °∠ °+ ∠ ° ∠ − ° + ∠ ° ∠ °

( ) ( ) ( )( )

( )( ) ( ) ( )

I

I2

1

780 0 1000 127 1000 233

780 0 1000 7 1000 353=

∠ °+ ∠ °+ ∠ °∠ °+ ∠ °+ ∠ ° )

I

I

j j

j j2

1

780 6018 798 6 6018 798 6

780 992 5 1219 992 5 1219=

− + + − −+ + + −

. . . .

. . . .Iavg

A A AA=

+ +=

780 1000 1000

3926 7.

I

I2

1

423 62765

=− .

I

I2

1

= -0.1532 x0 1532926 7

1000100% 14 2%UNBALANCE = - ´ =.

..


8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING

8

8.3.4 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST

The 369 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal. To test the phase reversal ele-ment, perform the following steps:


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye or DeltaSETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: OnSETPOINT S7:VOLTAGE ELEMENTS \ PHASE REVERSAL \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: TripSETPOINT S2: SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE : ABC

2. Apply voltages as per the table below. Verify the 369 operation on voltage phase reversal.

APPLIED VOLTAGEEXPECTED RESULT

NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP

OBSERVED RESULT NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP

Va=120V ∠0°Vb=120V ∠120°Vc=120V ∠240°

Va=120V ∠0°Vb=120V ∠240°Vc=120V ∠120°



8

8.3.5 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST

The 369 specification for short circuit timing is +40ms or ±0.5% of total time. The pickup accuracy is as per thephase current inputs. Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element.


SETPOINT S2:SYSTEM SETUP \ CT / VT SETUP \ PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000SETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: OnSETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: TripSETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP LEVEL: 5.0 x CTSETPOINT S4:CURRENT ELEMENTS \ SHORT CIRCUIT \ ADD S/C DELAY: 0

2. Inject current as per the table below, resetting the unit after each trip by pressing the [RESET] key, and ver-ify timing accuracy. Pre-trip values may be viewed in

ACTUAL VALUES A1: STATUS \ LAST TRIP DATA \

INJECTEDCURRENT

5A UNIT(A)

INJECTEDCURRENT

1A UNIT(A)

EXPECTEDTIME TO TRIP

(ms)

MEASUREDTIME TO TRIP

(ms)

30 6 <4040 8 <4050 10 <40


9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS

9

9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS 9.1.1 SETPOINTS TABLE

Table 9–1: SETPOINTS TABLE (Sheet 1 of 16)

GROUP DESCRIPTION MIN. MAX. SETTING

SETPOINT ACCESS Access Level

Access Password 0 65535

DISPLAYPROPERTIES

Default Message Cycle Time 5 100

Default Message Timeout 10 900

Contrast Adjustment 0 255

Display Update Interval 0.1 6.0Temperature Display Units C F

COMMUNICATIONS Slave Address 1 254

Computer RS232 Baud Rate 1200 19200

Computer RS232 Parity None odd, even

Channel 1 Baud Rate 1200 19200

Channel 1 Parity None odd, evenChannel 2 Baud Rate 1200 19200

Channel 2 Parity None odd, even

Channel 3 Connection RS485 fiber

Channel 3 Baud Rate 1200 19200

Channel 3 Parity None odd, even

WAVEFORMCAPTURE

Trigger Position 0 100Number of Records 8x8 1x64

MESSAGESCRATCHPAD

Text Message 1 0 40 char.




Text Message 5 0 40 char.DEFAULTMESSAGES

Default to Current Metering Yes No

Default to Motor Load Yes No

Default to Delta Voltage Metering Yes No

Default to Power Factor Yes No

Default to Positive Watthours Yes No

Default to Real Power Yes NoDefault to Reactive Power Yes No

Default to Hottest Stator RTD Yes No

Default to Text Message 1 Yes No

Default to Text Message 2 Yes No

INSTALLED Enable RRTD Module Yes No

CT / VT SETUP Phase CT Primary 1 5000Motor Full Load Amps 1 5000

Ground CT Type 1 5,or 50:.025

Ground CT Primary 1 5000

Voltage Transformer Connection Type None Wye,Delta

Voltage Transformer Ratio 1 240

Motor Rated Voltage 100 20000

Voltage Single VT Operation Off AB,CB,AN,BN,CN

Nominal Frequency 50,60 Variable

System Phase Sequence ABC ACBTRIP COUNTER Trip Counter Alarm Off L,UL

Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Alarm Pickup Level 1 50000

Trip Counter Alarm Events Off On


9.1 COMMISSIONING SETPOINTS 9 COMMISSIONING

9

STARTER FAILURE Starter Failure Alarm Off L,UL

Starter Type Breaker ContactorAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Starter Failure Delay 10 1000

Starter Failure Alarm Events Off On

CURRENT DEMAND Current Demand Period 5 90

Current Demand Alarm Off L,UL

Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2Current Demand Alarm Level 10 65535

Current Demand Alarm Events Off On

kW DEMAND kW Demand Period 5 90

kW Demand Alarm Off L,UL


kW Demand Alarm Level 1 50000kW Demand Alarm Events Off On

kvar DEMAND kvar Demand Period 5 90

kvar Demand Alarm Off L,UL


kvar Demand Alarm Level 1 50000

kvar Demand Alarm Events Off OnkVA DEMAND kVA Demand Period 5 90

kVA Demand Alarm Off L,UL


kVA Demand Alarm Level 1 50000

kVA Demand Alarm Events Off On

OUTPUT RELAY Trip Relay Reset Mode All Local,RemoteTrip Relay Operation FS NFS

Aux1 Relay Reset Mode All Local,Remote

Aux1 Relay Operation FS NFS

Aux2 Relay Reset Mode All Local,Remote

Aux2 Relay Operation FS NFS

Alarm Relay Reset Mode All Local,RemoteAlarm Relay Operation FS NFS

SERIAL COM.CONTROL

Serial Communication Control Off On

Assign Start Control Relays None Aux2

THERMAL MODEL Overload Pickup Level 1.01 1.25

Thermal Capacity Alarm Off L,UL

Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays None Aux2Thermal Capacity Alarm Level 1 100

Thermal Capacity Alarm Events No Yes

Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay None Aux2

Enable Unbalance Biasing No Yes

Unbalance k Factor Learned 29

Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio 0.01 1

Enable Learned Cool Time No YesRunning Cool Time Constant 1 500

Stopped Cool Time Constant 1 500

Enable RTD Biasing No Yes

RTD Bias Minimum 0 mid

RTD Bias Center Point min max

RTD Bias Maximum mid 200





9

O/L CURVE SETUP Select Curve Style Standard Custom

Standard Overload Curve Number 1 15Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA 0 65500

Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA 0 65500




Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA 0 65500Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA 0 65500




















Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA 0 65500OVERLOAD ALARM Overload Alarm Off L,UL

Overload Alarm Level 1.01 1.50

Assign Overload Alarm Relays None Aux2

Overload Alarm Delay 0.1 60.0

Overload Alarm Events Off On

SHORT CIRCUIT Short Circuit Trip Off L,ULAssign Trip Relays None Aux2

Short Circuit Pickup 2.0 20.0

Short Circuit Trip Delay 0.00 255.00

Short Circuit Trip Backup Off L,UL

Assign Backup Relays None Aux2

Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay 0.00 255.00

MECHNICAL JAM Mechanical Jam Alarm Off L,ULAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Mechanical Jam Alarm Pickup 1.01 6.00

Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay 0.5 125.0

Mechanical Jam Alarm Events Off On

Mechanical Jam Trip Off L,UL

Assign Trip Relays None Aux2Mechanical Jam Trip Pickup 1.01 6.00

Mechanical Jam Trip Delay 0.5 125.0





9

UNDERCURRENT Block Undercurrent from Start 0 15000

Undercurrent Alarm Off L,ULAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Undercurrent Alarm Pickup 0.1 0.99

Undercurrent Alarm Delay 1 255

Undercurrent Alarm Events Off On

Undercurrent Trip Off L,UL

Assign Trip Relays None Aux2Undercurrent Trip Pickup 0.1 0.99

Undercurrent Trip Delay 1 255

CURRENTUNBALANCE

Block Unbalance From Start 0 5000

Current Unbalance Alarm Off L,UL


Unbalance Alarm Pickup 4 30Unbalance Alarm Delay 1 255

Unbalance Alarm Events Off On

Current Unbalance Trip Off L,UL

Assign Trip Relays None Aux2

Unbalance Trip Pickup 4 30

Unbalance Trip Delay 1 255GROUND FAULT Ground Fault Alarm Off L,UL


Ground Fault Alarm Pickup 0.10 1.00

Alarm Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 0.25 25.00

Ground Fault Alarm Delay 0.00 255.00

Ground Fault Alarm Events Off OnGround Fault Trip Off L,UL


Ground Fault Trip Pickup 0.10 1.00

Trip Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 0.25 25.00

Ground Fault Trip Delay 0.00 255.00

Ground Fault Trip Backup Off OnGround Fault Trip Backup Relays None Aux1, Aux2

Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay 0.01 255.00

ACCELERATIONTRIP

Acceleration Trip Off L,UL


Acceleration Timer From Start 1 250

START INHIBITS Enable Single Shot Restart No YesEnable Start Inhibit No Yes

Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible Off 5

Time Between Starts Off 500

Restart Block Off 50000

Assign Start Inhibit Relays None Aux2

BACKSPINDETECTION

Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit No Yes

Low Frequency Start Level 2 30Minimum Voltage 30 15000

Samples before start 1 10000

Backspin Timer 1 50000

Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays None Aux2





9

Local RTD #1 Local RTD #1 Application None S,B,A,O

Local RTD #1 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120NLocal RTD #1 Name 0 8 chars.

Local RTD #1 Alarm Off L,UL

Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays None Aux2

Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200

Local RTD #1 High Alarm Off L,UL

Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays None Aux2Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200

Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events No Yes

Local RTD #1 Trip Off L,UL

Local RTD #1 Trip Relays None Aux2

Local RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200

Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Off 1-12,StatorLocal RTD #2 Local RTD #2 Application None S,B,A,O

Local RTD #2 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120N

Local RTD #2 Name 0 8 chars.



Local RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200Local RTD #2 High Alarm Off L,UL

Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays None Aux2

Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200



Local RTD #2 Trip Relays None Aux2Local RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200

Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting Off 1-12,Stator




Local RTD #3 Alarm Off L,ULLocal RTD #3 Alarm Relays None Aux2





Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events No YesLocal RTD #3 Trip Off L,UL








9








































9
























Local RTD#12 Local RTD #12 Application None S,B,A,O
















9

Remote RTD #1 Remote RTD #1 Application None S,B,A,O

Remote RTD #1 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120NRemote RTD #1 Name 0 8 chars.

Remote RTD #1 Alarm Off L,UL

Remote RTD #1 Alarm Relays None Aux2

Remote RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200

Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Off L,UL

Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Relays None Aux2Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200


Remote RTD #1 Trip Off L,UL

Remote RTD #1 Trip Relays None Aux2

Remote RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200

Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting Off 1-12,StatorRemote RTD #2 Remote RTD #2 Application None S,B,A,O

Remote RTD #2 RTD Type 10C,100P 100N,120N

Remote RTD #2 Name 0 8 chars.



Remote RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Off L,UL

Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Relays None Aux2

Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200



Remote RTD #2 Trip Relays None Aux2Remote RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200





Remote RTD #3 Alarm Off L,ULRemote RTD #3 Alarm Relays None Aux2





Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events No YesRemote RTD #3 Trip Off L,UL








9








































9




































OPEN RTD ALARM Open RTD Alarm Off L,UL


Open RTD Alarm Events Off OnSHORT/LOW TEMPRTD ALARM

Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm Off L,UL


Short / Low Temp Alarm Events Off On

LOSS OF REMOTERTD COMMs

Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Off L,UL

Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Relays None Aux2

Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Events Off On





9

UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped No Yes

Undervoltage Alarm Off L,ULAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 0.50 0.99

Running Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 0.50 0.99

Undervoltage Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0

Undervoltage Alarm Events Off On

Undervoltage Trip Off L,ULUndervoltage Trip Relays None Aux2

Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup 0.50 0.99

Running Undervoltage Trip Pickup 0.50 0.99

Undervoltage Trip Delay 0.0 255.0

OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Alarm Off L,UL

Overvoltage Alarm Relays None Aux2Overvoltage Alarm Pickup 1.01 1.25

Overvoltage Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0

Overvoltage Alarm Events Off On

Overvoltage Trip Off L,UL

Overvoltage Trip Relays None Aux2

Overvoltage Trip Pickup 1.01 1.25Overvoltage Trip Delay 0.0 255.0

PHASE REVERSAL Phase Reversal Trip Off L,UL

AssignTrip Relays None Aux2

UNDERFREQUENCY

Block Underfrequency on Start 0 5000

Underfrequency Alarm Off L,UL

Assign Alarm Relays None Aux2Underfrequency Alarm Level 20.00 70.00

Underfrequency Alarm Delay 0.0 255.0

Underfrequency Alarm Events Off On

Underfrequency Trip Off L,UL


Underfrequency Trip Level 20.00 70.00Underfrequency Trip Delay 0.0 255.0

OVER FREQUENCY Block Overrfrequency on Start 0 5000

Overfrequency Alarm Off L,UL


Overfrequency Alarm Level 20.00 70.00

Overfrequency Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0Overfrequency Alarm Events Off On

Overfrequency Trip Off L,UL


Overfrequency Trip Level 20.00 70.00

Overfrequency Trip Delay 0.1 255.0

LEAD POWERFACTOR

Block Lead Power Factor From Start 0 5000

Power Factor Lead Alarm Off L,ULPower Factor Lead Alarm Relays None ,Aux2

Power Factor Lead Alarm Level 0.5 0.99

Power Factor Lead Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0

Power Factor Lead Alarm Events Off On

Power Factor Lead Trip Off L,UL

Power Factor Lead Trip Relays None Aux2Power Factor Lead Trip Level 0.5 0.99

Power Factor Trip Lead Delay 0.1 255.0





9

LAG POWERFACTOR

Block Lag Power Factor From Start 0 5000

Lag Power Factor Alarm Off L,ULAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Lag Power Factor Alarm Level 0.5 0.99

Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0

Lag Power Factor Alarm Events Off On

Lag Power Factor Trip Off L,UL

AssignTrip Relays None Aux2Lag Power Factor Trip Level 0.5 0.99

Lag Power Factor Trip Delay 0.1 255.0

POSITIVEREACTIVE POWER

Block Positive kvar Element From Start 0 5000

Positive kvar Alarm Off L,UL


Positive kvar Alarm Level 1 25000Positive kvar Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0

Positive kvar Alarm Events Off On

Positive kvar Trip Off L,UL


Positive kvar Trip Level 1 25000

Positive kvar Trip Delay 0.1 255.0NEGATIVEREACTIVE

Block kvar Element from Start 0 5000

Negative kvar Alarm Off L,UL


Negative kvar Alarm Level 1 25000

Negative kvar Alarm Delay 0.1 255.0

Negative kvar Alarm Events Off OnNegative kvar Trip Off L,UL


Negative kvar Trip Level 1 25000

Negative kvar Trip Delay 0.1 255.0

UNDER POWER Block Underpower From Start 0 15000

Underpower Alarm Off L,ULAssign Alarm Relays None Aux2

Underpower Alarm Level 1 25000

Underpower Alarm Delay 0.5 255.0

Underpower Alarm Events Off On

Underpower Trip Off L,UL

Underpower Trip Relays None Aux2Underpower Trip Level 1 25000

Underpower Trip Delay 0.5 255.0

REVERSE POWER Block Reverse Power From Start 0 50000

Reverse Power Alarm Off L,UL


Reverse Power Alarm Level 1 25000

Reverse Power Alarm Delay 0.5 30.0Reverse Power Alarm Events Off On

Reverse Power Trip Off L,UL


Reverse Power Trip Level 1 25000

Reverse Power Trip Delay 0.5 30.0





9

SPARE SWITCH Spare Switch Assignable Function Off See manual

Starter Aux Contact Type 52a 52bGeneral Spare Switch Name 0 12 chars.

General Spare Switch Type NO NC

General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000

General Spare Switch Alarm Off L,UL

General Spare Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2

General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0General Spare Switch Alarm Events Off On

General Spare Switch Trip Off L,UL

General Spare Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Spare Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0

EMERGENCYSWITCH

Emergency Switch Assignable Function Off See manual

General Emergency Switch Name 0 12 chars.General Emergency Switch Type NO NC

General Emergency Switch Block Input FromStart

0 5000

General Emergency Switch Alarm Off L,UL

General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2

General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0

General Emergency Switch Alarm Events Off On

General Emergency Switch Trip Off L,UL

General Emergency Switch Trip Relays None Aux2General Emergency Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0

DIFFERENTIALSWITCH

Differential Switch Assignable Function Off See manual

Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Differential Switch Name 0 12 chars.

General Differential Switch Type NO NC

General Differential Switch Block Input FromStart

0 5000

General Differential Switch Alarm Off L,UL

General Differential Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0

General Differential Switch Alarm Events Off On

General Differential Switch Trip Off L,UL

General Differential Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Differential Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0

SPEED SWITCH Speed Switch Assignable Function Off See manualSpeed Switch Delay 0.5 100.0

Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Speed Switch Name 0 12 chars.

General Speed Switch Type NO NC

General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 0 5000

General Speed Switch Alarm Off L,UL

General Speed Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0

General Speed Switch Alarm Events Off On

General Speed Switch Trip Off L,UL

General Speed Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Speed Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0





9

REMOTE RESETSWITCH

Reset Switch Assignable Function Off See manual

First Character of Reset Switch Name 0 12 chars.General Reset Switch Type NO NC

General Reset Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000

General Reset Switch Alarm Off L,UL

General Reset Switch Alarm Relays None Aux2

General Reset Switch Alarm Delay 0.1 5000.0

General Reset Switch Alarm Events Off OnGeneral Reset Switch Trip Off L,UL

General Reset Switch Trip Relays None Aux2

General Reset Switch Trip Delay 0.1 5000.0

DIGITAL COUNTER

Assigned to:

Counter Name 0 8 chars.

Counter Units 0 6 chars.

Counter Type Increment DecrementDigital Counter Alarm Off L,UL


Counter Alarm Level 0 65535

Record Alarms as Events No Yes

ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Enable Analog Output 1 Disabled Enabled

Analog Output 1 Range 0-1 0-20,4-20Analog Output 1 Parameter - See Manual

Analog Output 1 Minimum - See Manual

Analog Output 1 Maximum - See Manual


Analog Output 2 Range 0-1 0-20,4-20

Analog Output 2 Parameter - See ManualAnalog Output 2 Minimum - See Manual




Analog Output 3 Parameter - See Manual

Analog Output 3 Minimum - See ManualAnalog Output 3 Maximum - See Manual



Analog Output 4 Parameter - See Manual

Analog Output 4 Minimum - See Manual





10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

10

10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE 10.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

The hardware or electrical interface is one of the following: one of three 2-wire RS485 ports from the rear termi-nal connector, the RS232 from the front panel connector or through a fibre optic connection. In a 2-wire RS485link, data flow is bi-directional. Data flow is half duplex for both the RS485 and the RS232 ports. That is, data isnever transmitted and received at the same time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy chain configura-tion (avoid star connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master endand at the slave farthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a 120 Ohm resistor inseries with a 1 nF ceramic capacitor when used with Belden 9841 RS485 wire. The value of the terminatingresistors should be equal to the characteristic impedance of the line. This is approximately 120 Ohms for stan-dard #22 AWG twisted pair wire. Shielded wire should always be used to minimize noise. Polarity is importantin RS485 communications. Each '+' terminal of every 369 must be connected together for the system to oper-ate. See chapter 2 INSTALLATION for details on correct serial port wiring.

When using a fibre optic link the Tx from the 369 should be connected to the Rx of the Master device and theRx from the 369 should be connected to the Tx of the Master device.

10.2 PROTOCOL 10.2.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The 369 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. Many popularprogrammable controllers support this protocol directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connectionof relays. Although the Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the 369 interfaces include three 2-wireRS485 ports and one RS232 port. Modbus is a single master, multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-dropconfiguration as provided by RS485 hardware. In this configuration up to 32 slaves can be daisy-chainedtogether on a single communication channel.

The 369 is always a slave. It cannot be programmed as a master. Computers or PLCs are commonly pro-grammed as masters. The Modbus protocol exists in two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) andASCII. Only the RTU version is supported by the 369. Monitoring, programming and control functions are pos-sible using read and write register commands.

10.2.2 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE

One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from an 369 is default to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1stop bit. This produces a 10 bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates(11 bit data frames are not supported by Hayes modems at bit rates of greater than 300 bps). The parity bit isoptional as odd or even. If it is programmed as odd or even, the data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1parity bit, and 1 stop bit.

Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The 369 RS485, fiber optic andRS232 ports support operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.


10.2 PROTOCOL 10 COMMUNICATIONS

10

10.2.3 DATA PACKET FORMAT

A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as separate data frames):

Master Request Transmission:SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byteDATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODECRC - 2 bytes

Slave Response Transmission:SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byteDATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODECRC - 2 bytes

SLAVE ADDRESS - This is the first byte of every transmission. This byte represents the user-assignedaddress of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave device must beassigned a unique address and only the addressed slave will respond to a transmission that starts with itsaddress. In a master request transmission the SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave to whichthe request is being sent. In a slave response transmission the SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address ofthe slave that is sending the response. Note: A master transmission with a SLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates abroadcast command. Broadcast commands can be used for specific functions.

FUNCTION CODE - This is the second byte of every transmission. Modbus defines function codes of 1 to 127.The 369 implements some of these functions. In a master request transmission the FUNCTION CODE tells theslave what action to perform. In a slave response transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave isthe same as the FUNCTION CODE sent from the master indicating the slave performed the function asrequested. If the high order bit of the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION CODEis > 127) then the slave did not perform the function as requested and is sending an error or exceptionresponse.

DATA - This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This may be Actual Val-ues, Setpoints, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. Data is sent MSBytefirst followed by the LSByte.

CRC - This is a two byte error checking code. CRC is sent LSByte first followed by the MSByte.


10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.2 PROTOCOL

10

10.2.4 ERROR CHECKING

The RTU version of Modbus includes a two byte CRC-16 (16 bit cyclic redundancy check) with every transmis-sion. The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parityignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a charac-teristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of thetransmission, LSByte first. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at thereceiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred.

If an 369 Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the CRC-16 calcula-tion, the slave device will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error indicates than one or more bytes ofthe transmission were received incorrectly and thus the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoidthe 369 performing any incorrect operation.

The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An algorithm is included hereto assist programmers in situations where no standard CRC-16 calculation routines are available.

CRC-16 Algorithm

Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC value to be transmitted.Note that this algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the char-acteristic polynomial is dropped since it does not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols areused in the algorithm:

--> data transferA 16 bit working registerAL low order byte of AAH high order byte of ACRC 16 bit CRC-16 valuei,j loop counters(+) logical exclusive or operatorDi i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit dropped and bit order reversedshr(x) shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit

of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift right one location

algorithm:

1.FFFF hex --> A2.0 --> i3.0 --> j4.Di (+) AL --> AL5.j+1 --> j6.shr(A)7.is there a carry? No: go to 8.Yes: G (+) A --> A8.is j = 8? No: go to 5.Yes: go to 9.9.i+1 --> i10.is i = N? No: go to 3.Yes: go to 11.11.A --> CRC


10.2 PROTOCOL 10 COMMUNICATIONS

10

10.2.5 TIMING

Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device must measure the timebetween the reception of characters. If three and one half character times elapse without a new character orcompletion of the packet, then the communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a newtransmission from the master). Thus at 9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 * 1/9600 * 10 = 3.65 ms willcause the communication link to be reset.


10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS

10

10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10.3.1 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS

The following functions are supported by the 369:

03 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values04 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values05 - Execute Operation06 - Store Single Setpoint07 - Read Device Status08 - Loopback Test16 - Store Multiple Setpoints

10.3.2 FUNCTION CODES 03 & 04 - READ SETPOINTS & ACTUAL VALUES

Modbus implementation: Read Input and Holding Registers

369 Implementation: Read Setpoints and Actual Values

For the 369 implementation of Modbus, these commands can be used to read any Setpoint ("holding regis-ters") or Actual Value ("input registers"). Holding and input registers are 16 bit (two byte) values transmittedhigh order byte first. Thus all 369 Setpoints and Actual Values are sent as two bytes. The maximum number ofregisters that can be read in one transmission is 125. Function codes 03 and 04 are configured to read set-points or actual values interchangeably because some PLCs do not support both function codes.

The slave response to these function codes is the slave address, function code, a count of the number of databytes to follow, the data itself and the CRC. Each data item is sent as a two byte number with the high orderbyte sent first. The CRC is sent as a two byte number with the low order byte sent first.

Message Format and Example:

Request slave 11 to respond with 2 registers starting at address 0308. For this example the register data inthese addresses is:

Address Data0308 00640309 000A

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 03 read registersDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 03 data starting at 0308

08NUMBER OF SETPOINTS 2 00 2 registers (4 bytes total)

02CRC 2 45 CRC calculated by the master

27

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 03 read registersBYTE COUNT 1 04 2 registers = 4 bytesDATA 1 2 00 value in address 0308

64DATA 2 2 00 value in address 0309

0ACRC 2 EB CRC calculated by the slave

91


10.3 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS 10 COMMUNICATIONS

10

10.3.3 FUNCTION CODE 05 - EXECUTE OPERATION

Modbus Implementation: Force Single Coil

369 Implementation: Execute Operation

This function code allows the master to request an 369 to perform specific command operations. The com-mand numbers listed in the Commands area of the memory map correspond to operation code for functioncode 05.

The operation commands can also be initiated by writing to the Commands area of the memory map usingfunction code 16. Refer to FUNCTION 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS for complete details.

Supported Operations

Reset 369 (operation code 1)

Motor Start (operation code 2)

Motor Stop (operation code 3)

Waveform Trigger (operation code 4)


Reset 369 (operation code 1).Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 05 execute operationOPERATION CODE 2 00 reset command (operation code 1)

01CODE VALUE 2 FF perform function

00CRC 2 DD CRCcalculated by the master

50

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 05 execute operationOPERATION CODE 2 00 reset command (operation code 1)

01CODE VALUE 2 FF perform function

00CRC 2 DD CRC calculated by the slave

50



10

10.3.4 FUNCTION CODE 06 - STORE SINGLE SETPOINT

Modbus Implementation: Preset Single Register

369 Implementation: Store Single Setpoint

This command allows the master to store a single setpoint into the memory of an 369. The slave response tothis function code is to echo the entire master transmission.


Request slave 11 to store the value 01F4 in Setpoint address 1180

After the transmission in this example is complete, Setpoints address 1180 will contain the value 01F4.

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 06 store single setpointDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 11 Setpoint address 1180

80DATA 2 01 data for address 1180

F4CRC 2 8D CRC calculated by the master

A3

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 06 store single SetpointDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 11 Setpoint address 1180

80DATA 2 01 data stored in address 1180

F4CRC 2 8D CRC calculated by the slave

A3



10

10.3.5 FUNCTION CODE 07 - READ DEVICE STATUS

Modbus Implementation: Read Exception Status

369 Implementation: Read Device Status

This is a function used to quickly read the status of a selected device. A short message length allows for rapidreading of status. The status byte returned will have individual bits set to 1 or 0 depending on the status of theslave device.

369 General Status Byte:

LSBit B0: Trip relay energized = 1B1: Aux 1 relay energized = 1B2: Aux 2 relay energized = 1B3: Alarm relay energized = 1B4: Stopped = 1B5: Starting = 1B6: Running = 1

MSBit B7: Tripped =1


Request status from slave 11.

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 07 read device statusCRC 2 47 CRC calculated by the master

42

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 07 read device statusDEVICE STATUS 1 59 status = 01011001 in binaryCRC 2 C2 CRC calculated by the slave

08



10

10.3.6 FUNCTION CODE 08 - LOOPBACK TEST

Modbus Implementation: Loopback Test

369 Implementation: Loopback Test

This function is used to test the integrity of the communication link. The 369 will echo the request.


Loopback test from slave 11.

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 08 loopback testDIAG CODE 2 00 must be 00 00

00DATA 2 00 must be 00 00

00CRC 2 E0 CRC calculated by the master

A1

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 08 loopback testDIAG CODE 2 00 must be 00 00

00DATA 2 00 must be 00 00

00CRC 2 E0 CRC calculated by the slave

A1



10

10.3.7 FUNCTION CODE 16 - STORE MULTIPLE SETPOINTS

Modbus Implementation: Preset Multiple Registers

369 Implementation: Store Multiple Setpoints

This function code allows multiple Setpoints to be stored into the 369 memory. Modbus "registers" are 16 bit(two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. Thus all 369 setpoints are sent as two bytes. The maximumnumber of Setpoints that can be stored in one transmission is dependent on the slave device. Modbus allowsup to a maximum of 60 holding registers to be stored. The 369 response to this function code is to echo theslave address, function code, starting address, the number of Setpoints stored, and the CRC.


Request slave 11 to store the value 01F4 to Setpoint address 1180 and the value 01DE to setpoint address1181. After the transmission in this example is complete, 369 slave 11 will have the following Setpoints infor-mation stored:

Address Data1180 01F41181 01DE

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store SetpointsDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 11 Setpoint address 1180

80NUMBER OF SETPOINTS 2 00 2 Setpoints (4 bytes total)

02BYTE COUNT 1 04 4 bytes of dataDATA 1 2 01 data for address 1180

F4DATA 2 2 01 data for address 1181

DECRC 2 DB CRC calculated by the master

B1

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store SetpointsDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 11 Setpoint address 1180

80NUMBER OF SETPOINTS 2 00 2 setpoints

02CRC 2 45 CRC calculated by the slave

B6



10

10.3.8 FUNCTION CODE 16 - PERFORMING COMMANDS

Some PLCs may not support execution of commands using function code 5 but do support storing multiple set-points using function code 16. To perform this operation using function code 16 (10H), a certain sequence ofcommands must be written at the same time to the 369. The sequence consists of : Command Function regis-ter, Command operation register and Command Data (if required). The Command Function register must bewritten with the value of 5 indicating an execute operation is requested. The Command Operation register mustthen be written with a valid command operation number from the list of commands shown in the memory map.The Command Data registers must be written with valid data if the command operation requires data. Theselected command will execute immediately upon receipt of a valid transmission.


Perform a reset on 369 (operation code 1).

Master Transmission Bytes Example (hex)SLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message for slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store SetpointsDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 00 Setpoint address 0080

80NUMBER OF SETPOINTS 2 00 2 Setpoints (4 bytes total)

02BYTE COUNT 1 04 4 bytes of dataCOMMAND FUNCTION 2 00 data for address 0080

05COMMAND OPERATION 2 00 data for address 0081

01CRC 2 0B CRC calculated by the master

D6

Slave ResponseSLAVE ADDRESS 1 0B message from slave 11FUNCTION CODE 1 10 store SetpointsDATA STARTING ADDRESS 2 00 Setpoint address 0080

80NUMBER OF SETPOINTS 2 00 2 setpoints

02CRC 2 40 CRC calculated by the slave

8A


10.4 ERROR RESPONSES 10 COMMUNICATIONS

10

10.4 ERROR RESPONSES 10.4.1 ERROR RESPONSES

When an 369 detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The MSbit of theFUNCTION CODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the functioncode sent from the master plus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of errorthat occurred.

Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the 369.

The slave response to an error (other than CRC error) will be:

SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1)EXCEPTION CODE - 1 byteCRC - 2 bytes

The 369 implements the following exception response codes.

01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION

The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 369.

02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS

The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable address for the 369.

03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected dataaddress.


10 COMMUNICATIONS 10.5 MEMORY MAP

10

10.5 MEMORY MAP 10.5.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION

The data stored in the 369 is grouped as Setpoints and Actual Values. Setpoints can be read and written by amaster computer. Actual Values are read only. All Setpoints and Actual Values are stored as two byte values.That is, each register address is the address of a two byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Datavalues (Setpoint ranges, increments, factory values) are in decimal.

Note: Many Modbus communications drivers add 40001d to the actual address of the registeraddresses. For example: if address 0h was to be read, 40001d would be the address required by theModbus communications driver; if address 320h (800d) was to be read, 40801d would be the addressrequired by the Modbus communications driver.

10.5.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA

The 369 has a powerful feature, called the User Definable Memory Map, which allows a computer to read up to124 non-consecutive data registers (setpoints or actual values) by using one Modbus packet. It is often neces-sary for a master computer to continuously poll various values in each of the connected slave relays. If thesevalues are scattered throughout the memory map, reading them would require numerous transmissions andwould burden the communication link. The User Definable Memory Map can be programmed to join any mem-ory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Map locations, so that they can be accessed by read-ing these consecutive locations.

The User Definable area has two sections:

1. A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180h-01FCh) that contains 125 Actual Values or Set-points register addresses.

2. A Register area (memory map addresses 0100h-017Ch) that contains the data at the addresses in theRegister Index.

Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to adjacent registeraddresses in the User Definable Registers area. This is accomplished by writing to register addresses in theUser Definable Register Index area. This allows for improved through-put of data and can eliminate the needfor multiple read command sequences.

For example, if the values of Average Phase Current (register address 0306h) and Hottest Stator RTD Temper-ature (register address 0320h) are required to be read from an 369, their addresses may be remapped as fol-lows:

1. Write 0306h to address 0180h (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function code 06 or 16.


(Average Phase Current is a double register number)


A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100h (User Definable Register 0000) and 0101h (User DefinableRegister 0001) will return the Phase A Current and register 0102h (User Definable Register 0002) will returnHottest Stator RTD Temperature.


10.5 MEMORY MAP 10 COMMUNICATIONS

10

10.5.3 EVENT RECORDER

The 369 event recorder data starts at address 3000h. Address 3003h is a pointer to the event of interest (1 rep-resenting the latest event and 40 representing the oldest event). To retrieve event 1, write ‘1’ to the EventRecord Selector (3003h) and read the data from 3004h to 3022h. To retrieve event 2, write ‘2’ to the EventRecord Selector (3003h) and read the data from 3004h to 3022h. All 40 events may be retrieved in this man-ner. The time and date stamp of each event may be used to ensure that all events have been retrieved in orderwithout new events corrupting the sequence of events (event 1 should be more recent than event 2, event 2should be more recent than event 3, etc...).


The 369 stores a number of cycles of A/D samples each time a trip occurs in a trace buffer, determined by thesetpoint in S1 Preferences, Trace Memory Buffers. The Trace Memory Trigger is set up in S1 Preferences andthis determines how many pre-trip and post-trip cycles are stored. The trace buffer is time and date stampedand may be correlated to a trip in the event record. 10 waveforms are captured this way when a trip occurs.These are the 3 phase currents, 3 differential currents, ground current and 3 voltage waveforms. This informa-tion is stored in volatile memory and will be lost if power is cycled to the relay.

To access the captured waveforms, select the waveform of interest by writing its trace memory channel (seefollowing table) to the Trace Memory Channel Selector (address 30F1h). Then read the trace memory datafrom address 3100h to 3400h. There are 12 samples per cycle for each of the cycles. The values read are inactual amperes or volts.

Address 30F8h shows the number of traces taken. To access the latest use the value at address 30F0h. Toaccess more than 1 trace, reduce this value to access the older traces.

TRACE MEMORYCHANNEL

WAVEFORM

0 Phase A current

1 Phase B current

2 Phase C current

3 Differential phase A current

4 Differential phase B current

5 Differential phase C current

6 Ground current

7 Phase A voltage

8 Phase B voltage

9 Phase C voltage

369 Motor Management Relay A- 1

APPENDIX A A.1 MEMORY MAPPING

AAPPENDIX A MEMORY MAPPINGA.1 MEMORY MAPPING A.1.1 MEMORY MAP

Table A–1: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 28)

GROUPADDR(hex)

DESCRIPTION MIN. MAX.STEP

VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT

Product ID (Addresses 0000 -007F)PRODUCT ID 0000 Multilin Product Code - - - - F1 53

0001 Product Hardware Revision 1 26 1 N/A F15 A0002 Firmware Revision N/A N/A N/A N/A F16 N/A0003 Modification Number 0 999 1 N/A F1 00004 Boot Revision 0 999 1 - F1 00005 Boot Mod Number - - - - - -0006 Reserved - - - - - -0007 Multilin 369 Accessories options 0 1 1 N/A FC149 00008 Order Code 0 63 1 N/A FC136 0

... ... - - - - - -

000F Modify Options 0 63 1 N/A FC149 00010 Modify Options Passcode Characters 1 & 2 32 127 1 - F1 ‘ ‘

... ... - - - - - -0017 Modify Options Passcode Characters 15 & 16 32 127 1 - F1 ‘ ‘

--- --- - - - - - -0020 Serial Number character 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0021 Serial Number character 3 and 4 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0022 Serial Number character 5 and 6 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0023 Serial Number character 7 and 8 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0024 Serial Number character 9 and 10 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0025 Serial Number character 11 and 12 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A

--- --- - - - - - -0030 Calibration Date 1995 2094 1 - F18 Jan.1,1999

--- - - - - - -0040 Manufacturing Date 1995 2094 1 - F18 Jan.1,1999

--- --- - - - - - -SETPOINT ACCESS 0050 Keypad Access Level 0 1 1 N/A FC162 0

0051 Comm Access Level 0 1 1 N/A FC162 00052 Access Password Character 1 & 2 32 127 1 - F1 “::”0053 Access Password Character 3 & 4 32 127 1 - F1 “::”0054 Access Password Character 5& 6 32 127 1 - F1 “::”0055 Access Password Character 7 & 8 32 127 1 - F1 “::”0056 Encrypted Access Password1 & 2 32 127 1 - F1 “AI”0057 Encrypted Access Password 3 & 4 32 127 1 - F1 “KF”0058 Encrypted Access Password 5& 6 32 127 1 - F1 “BA”0059 Encrypted Access Password 7 & 8 32 127 1 - F1 IK”

--- --- - - - - - -007F Reserved - - - - - -

Commands (Addresses 0080 -00FF)COMMANDS 0080 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 0

0081 ReservedUser Map (Addresses 0100 -017F)USER MAP VALUES 0100 User Map Value # 1 --- --- --- --- --- ---

0101 User Map Value # 2 --- --- --- --- --- ---... ...

017C User Map Value # 125 --- --- --- --- --- ---017D Reserved

... ...017F Reserved

USER MAP ADDRESSES 0180 User Map Address # 1 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 00181 User Map Address # 2 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 0

... ...01FC User Map Address # 125 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 001FD Reserved

... ...01FF Reserved

Actual Values (Addresses 0200 -0FFF)

A-2 369 Motor Management Relay

A.1 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX A

AMOTOR STATUS 0200 Motor Status 0 4 1 - FC133 0

0201 Motor Thermal Capacity Used 0 100 1 % F1 00202 Estimated Time to Trip on Overload -1 65500 1 s F20 -10204 Reserved

--- ---LAST TRIP DATA 0220 Cause of Last Trip 0 169 1 - FC134 0

0221 Time of Last Trip (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 -0223 Date of Last Trip (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 -0225 Reserved0226 Phase A Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F9 00228 Phase B Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F9 0022A Phase C Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F9 0022C Motor Load Pre - Trip 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0022D Current Unbalance Pre - Trip 0 100 1 % F1 0022E Ground Current Pre - Trip 0 50000 1 A FC23 00230 Reserved - - - - - -

---0234 Hottest Stator RTD During Trip 0 12 1 - F1 00235 Pre-Trip Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 oC F4 0

0236 Pre-Trip Voltage Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 00237 Pre-Trip Voltage Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 00238 Pre-Trip Voltage Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 00239 Pre-Trip Voltage Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0023A Pre-Trip Voltage Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0023B Pre-Trip Voltage Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 0023C Pre-Trip System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0023D Pre-Trip Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F12 0023E Pre-Trip Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F12 0023F Pre-Trip Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 00240 Pre-Trip Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 00241 Reserved - - - - - -

... - - - - - -


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AALARM STATUS 0260 General Spare Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

0261 General Emerency Restart Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00262 General Differential Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00263 General Speed Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00264 General Reset Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...0267 Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 4 1 - FC123 00268 Overload Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00269 Mechanical Jam Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0026A Undercurrent Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0026B Current Unbalance Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0026C Ground Fault Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...026F Undervoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00270 Overvoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00271 Under Frequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00272 Over Frequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...0275 Lead Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00276 Lag Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00277 Positive kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00278 Negative kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00279 Underpower Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0027A Reverse Power Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...027D Local RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0027E Local RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0027F Local RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00280 Local RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00281 Local RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00282 Local RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00283 Local RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00284 Local RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00285 Local RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00286 Local RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A0287 Local RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00288 Local RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...028B Local RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0028C Local RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0028D Local RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0028E Local RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0028F Local RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00290 Local RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00291 Local RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00292 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00293 Local RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00294 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00295 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 00296 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...0299 Remote RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029A Remote RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029B Remote RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029C Remote RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029D Remote RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029E Remote RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0029F Remote RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A0 Remote RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A1 Remote RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A2 Remote RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A3 Remote RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A4 Remote RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...02A7 Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A8 Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002A9 Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AA Remote RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AB Remote RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AC Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AD Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AE Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002AF Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B0 Remote RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B1 Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B2 Remote RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B3 Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B4 Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - FC156 002B5 Lost Remote RTD Communication 0 4 1 - FC123 0

... ...02B8 Trip Counter Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002B9 Starter Failure Alarm 0 4 1 - FC123 002BA Current Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002BB kW Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002BC kvar Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002BD kVA Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - FC123 002BE Self Test Alarm


0 = none

02C0 Overload Lockout Timer 0 500 1 min F1 002C1 Start Timer 1 0 60 1 min F1 002C2 Start Timer 2 0 60 1 min F1 002C3 Start Timer 3 0 60 1 min F1 002C4 Start Timer 4 0 60 1 min F1 002C5 Start Timer 5 0 60 1 min F1 002C6 Time Between Starts Timer 0 500 1 min F1 002C7 Restart Block Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 002C8 Backspin Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 002C0 Start Inhibit Timer 0 60 1 min F1 0


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A02CF Reserved

DIGITAL INPUT STATUS 02D0 Access 0 1 1 - FC131 002D1 Speed 0 1 1 - FC131 002D2 Spare 0 1 1 - FC131 002D3 Differential Relay 0 1 1 - FC131 002D4 Emergency Restart 0 1 1 - FC131 002D5 Reset 0 1 1 - FC131 002D6 Reserved

--- ---02FB Reserved

OUTPUT RELAY STATUS 02E0 Trip 0 2 1 N/A FC150 202E1 Alarm 0 2 1 N/A FC150 202E2 Aux.1 0 2 1 N/A FC150 202E3 Aux.2 0 2 1 N/A FC150 2

--- ---02E5 Reserved

REAL TIME CLOCK 02F0 Date (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A02F4 Time (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A

--- ---02FF Reserve

CURRENT METERING 0300 Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F9 00302 Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F9 00304 Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F9 00306 Average Phase Current 0 65535 1 A F9 00308 Motor Load 0 2000 1 xFLA F3 00309 Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 0030A Reserved - - - - - -030B Ground Current 0 50000 1 A FC23 0030D Reserved - - - - - -

... ...031E Reserved

TEMPERATURE 031F Hottest Stator RTD Number 0 12 1 - F1 00320 Hottest Stator RTD Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

0321 Local RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40









032A Local RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

032B Local RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

032C Local RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

032D Reserved--- ---

033D Reserved033E Hottest Stator RRTD Number 0 12 1 - F1 0033F Hottest Stator RRTD Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

0340 Remote RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40









GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A0348 Remote RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40


034A Remote RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

034B Remote RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

034C Reserved---

035F ReservedVOLTAGE METERING 0360 Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0

0361 Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 00362 Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 00363 Average Line Voltage 0 20000 1 V F1 00364 Van 0 20000 1 V F1 00365 Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 00366 Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 00367 Average_Phase_Voltage 0 20000 1 V F1 00368 System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 00369 Backspin Frequency 200 12000 1 Hz F3 0


POWER METERING 0370 Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 00371 Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F12 00373 Real Power 0 65000 1 hp F1 00374 Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F12 00376 Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 00377 Positive Watthours 0 65535 1 MWh F17 00379 Positive Varhours 0 65535 1 Mvarh F17 0037B Negative Varhours 0 65535 1 Mvarh F17 0037D Reserved


DEMAND METERING 0390 Current Demand 0 50000 1 A F9 00392 Real Power Demand 0 50000 1 kW F1 00394 Reactive Power Demand 0 50000 1 kvar F1 00396 Apparent Power Demand 0 50000 1 kVA F1 00397 Peak Current Demand 0 65535 1 A F9 00399 Peak Real Power Demand 0 50000 1 kW F1 0039B Peak Reactive Power Demand -32000 32000 1 kvar F1 0039D Peak Apparent Power Demand 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0039E Reserved

...03AF Reserved

MOTOR DATA

0 = OFF

03C0 Learned Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 003C1 Learned Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F9 003C2 Learned Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 003C3 Learned Running Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 003C4 Learned Stopped Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 003C5 Last Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F9 003C6 Last Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 003C7 Last Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 003C8 Average Motor Load Learned 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 003C9 Learned Unbalance k factor 0 29 1 - F1 0

... ...03D1 Reserved

... ...03D7 Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ARTD MAXIMUMS 03E0 Local RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

03E1 Local RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40









03EA Local RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

03EB Local RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

03EC Reserved... ...

03FF Reserved0400 Remote RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

0401 Remote RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40









040A Remote RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

040B Remote RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40


TRIP COUNTERS 0430 Total Number of Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0... ...

0433 Switch Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0... ...

0436 Overload Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00437 Short Circuit Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00438 Mechanical Jam Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00439 Undercurrent Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043A Current Unbalance Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043B Single Phase Trips043C Ground Fault Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043D Acceleration Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... ...043F Under Voltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00440 Over Voltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00441 Phase Reversal Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00442 Under Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00443 Over Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... ...0446 Lead Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00447 Lag Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00448 Positive Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00449 Negative Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044A Underpower Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044B Reverse Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... ...044E Stator RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044F Bearing RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00450 Other RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A0451 Ambient RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... ...0454 Incomplete Sequence Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

...0457 Trip Counters Last Cleared N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A


MOTOR STATISTICS 0470 Number of Motor Starts 0 50000 1 - F1 00471 Number of Emergency Restarts 0 50000 1 - F1 00472 Reserved - - - - - -0473 Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F9 0

... ...049F Reserved04A0 Motor Running Hours 0 65535 1 hr F9 0

... ...04BF Reserved - - - - - -

PHASORS 0500 Va Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00501 Vb Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00502 Vc Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00503 Ia Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00504 Ib Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00505 Ic Angle 0 359 1 o F1 00506 Reserved

... ...0FFF Reserved

Setpoints (Addresses 1000 -1FFF)DISPLAY PREFERENCES 1000 Default Message Cycle Time 5 100 1 s F1 20

1001 Default Message Timeout 10 900 1 s F1 3001002 Contrast Adjustment 0 255 1 - F1 1451003 1 60 1 s F2 41004 Temperature Display Units 0 1 1 - FC100 01005 Reserved

... ...1007 Reserved

WAVEFORM CAPTURE 1008 Trigger Position 0 100 1 % F1 501009 Number of Records 0 3 1 - FC152 2

369 COMMUNIC ATIONS 1010 Slave Address 1 254 1 - F1 2541011 Computer RS232 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - FC101 41012 Computer RS232 Parity 0 2 1 - FC102 01013 CHANNEL 1 Parity 0 2 1 - FC101 41014 CHANNEL 1 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - FC102 01015 CHANNEL 2 Parity 0 2 1 - FC101 41016 CHANNEL 2 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - FC102 01017 CHANNEL 3 Parity 0 2 1 - FC101 41018 CHANNEL 3 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - FC102 01019 CHANNEL 3 Connection 0 1 1 - FC151 0101A CHANNEL 3 Application 0 1 1 - FC149 0

...102F Reserved

REAL TIME CLOCK 1030 Date (2 words) valid date N/A - F18 -1034 Time (2 words) valid time N/A - F19 -

...103B Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ADEFAULT MESSAGES 1040 Reserved

1041 Default to Current Metering 0 1 1 - FC103 01042 Default to Motor Load 0 1 1 - FC103 01043 Default to Delta Voltage Metering 0 1 1 - FC103 01044 Default to Power Factor 0 1 1 - FC103 01045 Default to Positive Watthours 0 1 1 - FC103 01046 Default to Real Power 0 1 1 - FC103 01047 Default to Reactive Power 0 1 1 - FC103 01048 Default to Hottest Stator RTD 0 1 1 - FC103 01049 Default to Text Message 1 0 1 1 - FC103 0104A Default to Text Message 2 0 1 1 - FC103 0

... - - - - - -105F Reserved

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD 1060 1st Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’1061 2nd Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’e’

...1087 40th Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’1088 1st Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’1089 2nd Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’e’

...10AF 40th Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’10B0 1st Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’10B1 2nd Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’e’

...10D7 40th Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’10D8 1st Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’10D9 2nd Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’e’

...10FF 40th Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’1100 1st Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’1101 2nd Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’e’

...1127 40th Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’

...112F Reserved

CLEAR/ PRESET DATA 1130 Clear Last Trip Data 0 1 1 - FC103 01131 Clear Peak Demand Data 0 1 1 - FC103 01132 Clear RTD Maximums 0 1 1 - FC103 01133 Preset MWh 0 65535 1 MWh F17 01134 Clear Trip Counters 0 1 1 - FC103 01135 Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F9 01136 Clear Event Records 0 1 1 - FC103 01137 Preset Mvarh 0 65535 1 Mvarh F17 0

...113F Reserved1140 Clear Motor Data 0 1 1 - FC103 01141 Reserved - - - - - -1142 Clear All Data 0 1 1 - FC103 0

...117F Reserved

CT / VT SETUP 1180 Phase CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 5001181 Motor Full Load Amps 1 5000 1 A F1 101182 Ground CT Type 0 3 1 - FC104 21183 Ground CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 100

...119F Reserved11A0 Voltage Transformer Connection Type 0 2 1 - FC106 011A1 Voltage Transformer Ratio 100 24000 1 - F3 3511A2 Motor Rated Voltage 100 20000 1 V F1 416011A3 Voltage Single VT Operation 0 3 1 - FC143 0

...11BF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A11C0 Nominal Frequency 0 2 1 - FC107 011C1 System Phase Sequence 0 1 1 - FC124 011C2 Reserved

...11C7 Reserved

SERIAL COM. CONTROL 11C8 Serial Communication Control 0 1 1 - FC103 011C9 Assign Start Control Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 211CA Reserved

---11CF Reserved

REDUCED VOLTAGE 11D0 Reduced Voltage Starting 0 1 1 - FC103 011D1 Start Control Relays 0 2 1 - FC113 411D2 Transition On 0 2 1 - FC108 011D3 Incomplete Sequence Trip Relays 0 6 1 - FC111 011D4 Reduced Voltage Start Level 25 300 1 % FLA F1 10011D5 Reduced Voltage Start Timer 1 500 1 s F1 200

...11DF Reserved

INSTALLED OPTIONS ANDACCESSORIES

1200 Reserved - - - - - -1201 Enable RTD Option 0 1 0 - FC103 01202 Enable Metering/Backspin Option 0 2 0 - FC103 01203 Reserved - - - - - -1204 Enable Fiber Optic Port 0 1 0 - FC103 01205 Enable Profibus Interface 0 1 0 - FC103 01206 Enable RRTD Module 0 2 0 - FC149 01207 Reserved - - - - - -1208 Enter Passcode 1 32 127 1 - F1 01209 Enter Passcode 2 32 127 1 F1 0120A Enter Passcode 3 32 127 1 F1 0120B Enter Passcode 4 32 127 1 F1 0120C Enter Passcode 5 32 127 1 F1 0120D Enter Passcode 6 32 127 1 F1 0120E Enter Passcode 7 32 127 1 F1 0120F Enter Passcode 8 32 127 1 F1 01210 Enter Passcode 9 32 127 1 F1 01211 Enter Passcode 10 32 127 1 F1 0

---129F Reserved

DIGITAL COUNTER 12E6 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”12F2 First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’12F8 Counter Type 0 1 1 - FC114 012F9 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 012FA Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - FC113 012FB Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F9 10012FD Reserved - - - - - -12FE Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 0

EMERGENCY 1330 First Character of Emergency Switch Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’G’1340 General Emergency Switch Type 0 1 1 - FC116 01341 General Emergency Switch Block Input From

Start0 5000 1 s F1 0

1342 General Emergency Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01343 General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - FC113 01344 General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501345 General Emergency Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01346 General Emergency Switch Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01347 General Emergency Switch Trip Relays 0 6 1 - FC111 01348 General Emergency Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501349 Emergency Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - FC110 0134A Reserved

...135F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ADIFFERENTIAL 1370 First Character of Differential Switch Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’G’

1380 General Differential Switch Type 0 1 1 - FC116 01381 General Differential Switch Block Input From

Start0 5000 1 s F1 0

1382 General Differential Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01383 General Differential Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11384 General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501385 General Differential Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01386 General Differential Switch Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01387 General Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11388 General Differential Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501389 Differential Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - FC157 0138A Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 1

...138F Reserved

SPEED 13A0 First Character of Speed Switch Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’G’13B0 General Speed Switch Type 0 1 1 - FC116 013B1 General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 013B2 General Speed Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 013B3 General Speed Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 113B4 General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013B5 General Speed Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 013B6 General Speed Switch Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 013B7 General Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 113B8 General Speed Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013B9 Speed Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - FC158 013BA Speed Switch Delay 5 1000 5 100ms F2 2013BB Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 1

...13BF Reserved

RESET 13D0 First Character of Reset Switch Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’G’13E0 General Reset Switch Type 0 1 1 - FC116 013E1 General Reset Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 013E2 General Reset Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 013E3 General Reset Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 113E4 General Reset Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013E5 General Reset Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 013E6 General Reset Switch Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 013E7 General Reset Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 113E8 General Reset Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013E9 Reset Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - FC160 0

...13FF Reserved

SPARE 1400 First Character of Spare Switch Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’G’1410 General Spare Switch Type 0 1 1 - FC116 01411 General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01412 General Spare Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01413 General Spare Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11414 General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501415 General Spare Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01416 General Spare Switch Trip 0 1 1 - FC115 01417 General Spare Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11418 General Spare Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501419 Spare Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - FC159 0141A Starter Aux Contact Type 0 1 1 - FC109 0

...14FF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AOUTPUT RELAY SETUP 1500 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - FC117 0

1501 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - FC117 01502 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - FC117 01503 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - FC117 0

...1509150A Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - FC161 0150B Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - FC161 1150C Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - FC161 1150D Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - FC161 0

...157F Reserved - - - - - -

THERMAL MODEL

0 =Off

1580 Reserved - - - - - -1581 Overload Pickup Level 101 125 1 .01xFLA F3 1011582 Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay 0 7 1 - FC111 11583 Unbalance k Factor (0=Learned) 0 29 1 - F1 01584 Running Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 151585 Stopped Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 301586 Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio 1 100 1 - F3 1001587 RTD Biasing 0 1 1 - FC103 01588 RTD Bias Minimum 0 198 1 oC F1 40

1589 RTD Bias Mid Point 0 199 1 oC F1 120

158A RTD Bias Maximum 0 200 1 oC F1 155

158B Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 0158C Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 1158D Thermal Capacity Alarm Level 1 100 1 % used F1 75158E Thermal Capacity Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 0158F Enable Learned Cool Time 0 1 1 - FC103 01590 Enable Unbalance Biasing 0 1 1 - FC103 01591 Reserved - - - - - -

...15AE Select Curve Style 0 1 1 - FC128 0

O/L CURVESETUP

15AF Standard Overload Curve Number 1 15 1 - F1 415B0 Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1741515B2 Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 341515B4 Time to Trip at 1.10 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 166715B6 Time to Trip at 1.20 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 79515B8 Time to Trip at 1.30 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 50715BA Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 36515BC Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 28015BE Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 17015C0 Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 11715C2 Time to Trip at 2.25 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 8615C4 Time to Trip at 2.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 6715C6 Time to Trip at 2.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 5315C8 Time to Trip at 3.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 4415CA Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 3715CC Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 3115CE Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 2715D0 Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 2315D2 Time to Trip at 4.25 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 2115D4 Time to Trip at 4.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1815D6 Time to Trip at 4.75 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1615D8 Time to Trip at 5.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1515DA Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1215DC Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 1015DE Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 915E0 Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 715E2 Time to Trip at 7.50 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 615E4 Time to Trip at 8.00 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 615E6 Time to Trip at 10.0 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 615E8 Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 6


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A15EA Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA 0 65500 1 s F1 615EC Reserved

...

...163F

SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP

0=instantaneous time delay.

1640 Short Circuit Trip 0 1 1 - FC103 01641 Reserved1642 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11643 Short Circuit Pickup 20 200 1 x CT F2 1001644 Short Circuit Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 01645 Short Circuit Trip Backup 0 2 1 - FC115 01646 Assign Backup Relays 0 3 1 - FC119 11647 Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay 0 25500 0.01 s F3 01648 Reserved

...164F Reserved

OVERLOAD ALARM 1650 Overload Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01651 Overload Alarm Level 101 150 1 .01XFLA F3 1011652 Assign Overload Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11653 Overload Alarm Delay 1 600 1 s F2 11654 Overload Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 0165F Reserved

MECHNICALJAM

1660 Mechanical Jam Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01661 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11662 Mechanical Jam Alarm Pickup 101 600 1 .01XFLA F3 1501663 Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 101664 Mechanical Jam Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01665 Mechanical Jam Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01666 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11667 Mechanical Jam Trip Pickup 101 600 1 .01XFLA F3 1501668 Mechanical Jam Trip Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 10166F Reserved - - - - - -

UNDERCURRENT 1670 Block Undercurrent from Start 0 15000 1 s F1 01671 Undercurrent Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01672 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11673 Undercurrent Alarm Pickup 10 99 1 .01XFLA F3 701674 Undercurrent Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 11675 Undercurrent Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01676 Undercurrent Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01677 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11678 Undercurrent Trip Pickup 10 99 1 .01XFLA F3 701679 Undercurrent Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1

...167F Reserved

CURRENT UNBALANCE 1680 Block Unbalance From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01681 Current Unbalance Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01682 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11683 Unbalance Alarm Pickup 4 30 1 % F1 151684 Unbalance Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 11685 Unbalance Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01686 Current Unbalance Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01687 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11688 Unbalance Trip Pickup 4 30 1 % F1 201689 Unbalance Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1

...169F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AGROUND FAULT 16A0 Reserved

16A1 Ground Fault Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 016A2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 116A3 Ground Fault Alarm Pickup 10 100 1 0.1XCT F3 1016A4 Alarm Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 25 2500 1 Amps F3 2516A5 Ground Fault Alarm Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 016A6 Ground Fault Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 016A7 Ground Fault Trip 0 2 1 - FC 115 016A8 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC 111 116A9 Ground Fault Trip Pickup 10 100 1 0.1XCT F3 2016AA Trip Pickup for Multilin CT 50 / .025 25 2500 1 0.1XCT F3 2516AB Ground Fault Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 016AC Ground Fault Trip Backup 0 1 1 - FC103 016AD Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays 0 3 1 - FC119 3316AE Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay 0.10 255.00 0.01 s F3 0.2016AF Reserved

---16CF Reserved - - - - - -

ACCELERATION TRIP 16D0 Acceleration Trip 0 1 1 - FC115 016D1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 116D2 Acceleration Timer From Start 10 2500 1 1s F1 10016D3 Reserved - - - - - -16D4 Reserved - - - - - -

START INHIBITS

0 = Off

16E0 Enable Single Shot Restart 0 1 1 - FC103 016E1 Enable Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - FC103 016E2 Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible 0 5 1 - F1 016E3 Time Between Starts 0 500 1 min F1 1016E4 Restart Block 0 50000 1 s F1 016E5 Assign Start Inhibit Relay 0 7 1 - FC111 1

---

1701 Reserved - - - - - -BACKSPIN DETECTION 1780 Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - FC103 0

1781 Low Frequency Start Level 2 30 1 Hz F1 21782 Minimum Voltage 30 15000 1 mV F1 301783 Samples before start 1 10000 1 - F1 11784 Backspin Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 01785 Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11786 Reserved - - - - - -

---178F Reserved - - - - - -

Local RTD #1 1790 Local RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 01791 Local RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01792 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21793 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1794 Local RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01795 Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11796 Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1797 Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01798 Local RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01799 Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 1179A Local RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 1179B Local RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

179C Local RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 017A0 First Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- --- - - - - - -17A3 8th Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’17A4 Reserved

---


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ALocal RTD #2 17B0 Local RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

17B1 Local RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017B2 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 217B3 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17B4 Local RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017B5 Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 117B6 Local RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17B7 Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 017B8 Local RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - FC 115 017B9 Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 117BA Local RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 117BB Local RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17BC Local RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 017C0 First Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---17C3 8th Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’17C4 Reserved

---17CF Reserved

Local RTD #3 17D0 Local RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 017D1 Local RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017D2 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 217D3 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17D4 Local RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017D5 Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 117D6 Local RTD #3 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17D7 Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 017D8 Local RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 017D9 Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 117DA Local RTD #3 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 117DB Local RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17DC Local RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 017E0 First Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---17E3 8th Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’17E4 Reserved

---17EF Reserved

Local RTD #4 17F0 Local RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 017F1 Local RTD #4 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017F2 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 217F3 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17F4 Local RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 017F5 Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 117F6 Local RTD #4 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17F7 Enable RTD #4 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 017F8 Local RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 017F9 Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 117FA Local RTD #4 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 117FB Local RTD #4 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

17FC Local RTD #4 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01800 First Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---1803 8th Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’1804 Reserved

---180F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ALocal RTD #5 1810 Local RTD #5 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

1811 Local RTD #5 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01812 Local RTD #5 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11813 Local RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 250 1 oC / oF F1 130



181C Local RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01820 First Character of Local RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


---182F Reserved






---184F Reserved






---186F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ALocal RTD #8 1870 Local RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

1871 Local RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01872 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21873 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130





---188F Reserved




189C Local RTD #9 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 018A0 First Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---18A3 8th Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’18A4 Reserved

---18AF Reserved

Local RTD #10 18B0 Local RTD #10 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 018B1 Local RTD #10 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018B2 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 218B3 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18B4 Local RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018B5 Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 118B6 Local RTD #10 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18B7 Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 018B8 Local RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 018B9 Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 118BA Local RTD #10 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 118BB Local RTD #10 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18BC Local RTD #10 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 018C0 First Character of Local RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---18C3 8th Character of RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’18C4 Reserved

---18CF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ALocal RTD #11 18D0 Local RTD #11 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

18D1 Local RTD #11 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018D2 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 218D3 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18D4 Local RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018D5 Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 118D6 Local RTD #11 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18D7 Record RTD #11 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 018D8 Local RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 018D9 Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 118DA Local RTD #11 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 118DB Local RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18DC Local RTD #11 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 018E0 First Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---18E3 8th Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’18E4 Reserved

---18EF Reserved

Local RTD#12 18F0 Local RTD #12 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 018F1 Local RTD #12 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018F2 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 218F3 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18F4 Local RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 018F5 Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 118F6 Local RTD #12 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18F7 Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 018F8 Local RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 018F9 Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 118FA Local RTD #12 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 118FB Local RTD #12 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

18FC Local RTD #12 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01900 First Character of Local RTD #12 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


---190F Reserved

Remote RTD #1 1910 Remote RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 01911 Remote RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01912 Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21913 Remote RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1914 Remote RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01915 Remote RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11916 Remote RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1917 Record RRTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01918 Remote RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01919 Enable RRTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 1191A Remote RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 1191B Remote RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

191C Remote RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01920 First Character of Remote RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---1923 8th Character of Remote RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’1924 Reserved

---192F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ARemote RTD #2 1930 Remote RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

1931 Remote RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01932 Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21933 Remote RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130





---194F Reserved

Remote RTD #3 1950 Remote RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 01951 Remote RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01952 Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21953 Remote RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130



195C Remote RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01960 First Character of Remote RTD # Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---1963 8th Character of Remote RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’

1964 Reserved---

196F ReservedRemote RTD #4 1970 Remote RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0






---198F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ARemote RTD #5 1990 Remote RTD #5 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0




199C Remote RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 019A0 First Character of Remote RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---19A3 8th Character of Remote RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’19A4 Reserved

---19AF Reserved

Remote RTD #6 19B0 Remote RTD #6 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 019B1 Remote RTD #6 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019B2 Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 119B3 Remote RTD #6 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19B4 Remote RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019B5 Remote RTD #6 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 119B6 Remote RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19B7 Record RRTD #6 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 019B8 Remote RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 019B9 Enable RRTD #6 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 119BA Remote RTD #6 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 119BB Remote RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19BC Remote RTD #6 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 019C0 First Character of Remote RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---19C3 8th Character of Remote RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’19C4 Reserved

---19CF Reserved

Remote RTD #7 19D0 Remote RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 019D1 Remote RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019D2 Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 219D3 Remote RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19D4 Remote RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019D5 Remote RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 119D6 Remote RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19D7 Record RRTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 019D8 Remote RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 019D9 Enable RRTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 119DA Remote RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 119DB Remote RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19DC Remote RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 019E0 First Character of Remote RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

--- ---19E3 8th Character of Remote RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’19E4 Reserved

---19EF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ARemote RTD #8 19F0 Remote RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

19F1 Remote RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019F2 Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 219F3 Remote RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19F4 Remote RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 019F5 Remote RTD #8 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 119F6 Remote RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19F7 Record RRTD #8 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 019F8 Remote RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 019F9 Enable RRTD #8 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 119FA Remote RTD #8 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 119FB Remote RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

19FC Remote RTD #8 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01A00 First Character of Remote RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


---1A0F Reserved

Remote RTD #9 1A10 Remote RTD #9 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 01A11 Remote RTD #9 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01A12 Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21A13 Remote RTD #9 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1A14 Remote RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01A15 Remote RTD #9 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11A16 Remote RTD #9 Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1A17 Record RRTD #9 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01A18 Remote RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01A19 Enable RRTD #9 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - FC122 11A1A Remote RTD #9 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11A1B Remote RTD #9 Trip Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130

1A1C Remote RTD #9 RTD Type 0 3 1 - FC120 01A20 First Character of Remote RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


---1A2F Reserved






---1A4F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ARemote RTD #11 1A50 Remote RTD #11 Application 0 4 1 - FC121 0

1A51 Remote RTD #11 High Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01A52 Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 21A53 Remote RTD #11 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 oC F1 130





---1A6F Reserved






---1B17 Reserved

LOSS OF REMOTE RTDCOMM

1B18 Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01B19 Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11B1A Loss Remote RTD Comm Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01B1B Reserved

...1B1F Reserved

OPEN RTD ALARM 1B20 Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01B21 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11B22 Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 0


1B23 Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01B24 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11B25 Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01B26 Reserved - - - - - -

---- - - - - -


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AUNDERVOLTAGE 1B60 Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped 0 1 1 - FC103 0

1B61 Undervoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01B62 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11B63 Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 851B64 Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 851B65 Undervoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 301B66 Undervoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01B67 Undervoltage Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01B68 Undervoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11B69 Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 801B6A Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 x Rated F3 801B6B Undervoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 301B6C Reserved

...1B7F Reserved

OVERVOLTAGE 1B80 Overvoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01B81 Overvoltage Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11B82 Overvoltage Alarm Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 1051B83 Overvoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101B84 Overvoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01B85 Overvoltage Trip 0 1 1 - FC103 01B86 Overvoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11B87 Overvoltage Trip Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 1101B88 Overvoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101B89 Reserved

...1B9F Reserved

PHASE REVERSAL 1BA0 Phase Reversal Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01BA1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BA2 Reserved - - - - - -

...1BAF Reserved

OVER FREQUENCY 1BB0 Block Overfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BB1 Overfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01BB2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11BB3 Overfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 60501BB4 Overfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BB5 Overfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01BB6 Overfrequency Trip 0 1 1 - FC103 01BB7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BB8 Overfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 60501BB9 Overfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BBA Reserved - - - - - -

...1BBF

UNDER FREQUENCY 1BC0 Block Underfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BC1 Underfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01BC2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11BC3 Underfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 59501BC4 Underfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BC5 Underfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01BC6 Underfrequency Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01BC7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BC8 Underfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 59501BC9 Underfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BCA Reserved

---1BCF


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



ALEAD POWER FACTOR 1BD0 Block Lead Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1

1BD1 Lead Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01BD2 Assign Lead Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11BD3 Lead Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 301BD4 Lead Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BD5 Lead Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01BD6 Lead Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01BD7 Lead Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BD8 Lead Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 301BD9 Lead Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BDA Reserved

---1BDF

LAG POWER FACTOR 1BE0 Block Lag Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BE1 Lag Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01BE2 Assign Lag Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11BE3 Lag Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 851BE4 Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BE5 Lag Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01BE6 Lag Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01BE7 Assign Lag Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BE8 Lag Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 801BE9 Lag Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BEA Reserved

...1BEF Reserved

POSITIVE REACTIVEPOWER

1BF0 Block Positive kvar Element From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BF1 Positive kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01BF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11BF3 Positive kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 101BF4 Positive kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BF5 Positive kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01BF6 Positive kvar Trip 0 1 1 - FC103 01BF7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11BF8 Positive kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 251BF9 Positive kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BFA Reserved

...1BFF Reserved

NEGATIVE REACTIVE 1C00 Block kvar Element from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11C01 Negative kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01C02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11C03 Negative kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 101C04 Negative kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101C05 Negative kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01C06 Negative kvar Trip 0 1 1 - FC103 01C07 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11C08 Negative kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 251C09 Negative kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101C0A Reserved

...1C0F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AUNDERPOWER 1C10 Block Underpower From Start 0 15000 1 s F1 0

1C11 Underpower Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01C12 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11C13 Underpower Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 21C14 Underpower Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 11C15 Underpower Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01C16 Underpower Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01C17 Underpower Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11C18 Underpower Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 11C19 Underpower Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F1 11C1A Reserved

...1C1F Reserved

REVERSE POWER 1C20 Block Reverse Power From Start 0 50000 1 s F1 01C21 Reverse Power Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01C22 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11C23 Reverse Power Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 21C24 Reverse Power Alarm Delay 2 300 1 s F2 11C25 Reverse Power Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01C26 Reverse Power Trip 0 2 1 - FC115 01C27 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - FC111 11C28 Reverse Power Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 11C29 Reverse Power Trip Delay 2 300 1 s F2 11C2A Reserved

...1C2F Reserved

TRIP COUNTER 1C80 Trip Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01C81 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11C82 Alarm Pickup Level 0 50000 1 - F1 251C83 Trip Counter Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01C84 Reserved

...

...1C8F Reserved

STARTER FAILURE 1C90 Starter Failure Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01C91 Starter Type 0 1 1 - FC125 01C92 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11C93 Starter Failure Delay 10 1000 10 ms F1 1001C94 Starter Failure Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01C95 Reserved

...1CCF Reserved

CURRENT DEMAND 1CD0 Current Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151CD1 Current Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01CD2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11CD3 Current Demand Alarm Level 10 65535 1 A F9 1001CD5 Current Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01CD6 Reserved

...1CDF Reserved

kW DEMAND 1CE0 kW Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151CE1 kW Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01CE2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11CE3 kW Demand Alarm Level 1 50000 1 kW F1 1001CE4 kW Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01CE5 Reserved

...1CEF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



Akvar DEMAND 1CF0 kvar Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 15

1CF1 kvar Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01CF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11CF3 kvar Demand Alarm Level -32000 32000 1 kvar F1 1001CF4 kvar Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01CF5 Reserved

...1CFF Reserved

kVA DEMAND 1D00 kVA Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151D01 kVA Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - FC115 01D02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - FC113 11D03 kVA Demand Alarm Level 1 50000 1 kVA F1 1001D04 kVA Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - FC103 01D05 Reserved

...

...1D3F Reserved

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1D40 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - FC103 01D41 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - FC26 01D42 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 0 48 1 - FC127 01D43 Analog Output 1 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D44 Analog Output 1 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D45 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - FC103 01D46 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - FC26 01D47 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 0 48 1 - FC127 01D48 Analog Output 2 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D49 Analog Output 2 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - FC103 01D4B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - FC26 01D4C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 0 48 1 - FC127 01D4D Analog Output 3 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4E Analog Output 3 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - FC103 01D50 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - FC26 01D51 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 0 48 1 - FC127 01D52 Analog Output 4 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D53 Analog Output 4 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D54 Reserved

---1EFF Reserved

SIMULATIONMODE

1F00 Simulation Mode 0 3 1 - FC138 01F01 Pre-Fault to Fault Time Delay 0 300 1 s F1 101F02 Reserved

...1F0F Reserved

PRE-FAULTVALUES

1F10 Pre-Fault Current Phase A 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 01F11 Pre-Fault Current Phase B 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 01F12 Pre-Fault Current Phase C 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 01F13 Pre-Fault Ground Current 0 50000 1 A FC23 01F14 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase A 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F15 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase B 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F16 Pre - Fault Voltage Phase C 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F17 Pre-Fault Current Lags Voltage 0 359 1 degrees F1 01F18 Pre - Fault System Frequency 250 700 1 Hz F2 6001F19 Stator RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F1A Bearing RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F1B Other RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F1C Ambient RTD Pre-Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

... ... - - - - - -1F3F Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AFAULT SETUP 1F40 Fault Current Phase A 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 0

1F41 Fault Current Phase B 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 01F42 Fault Current Phase C 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 01F43 Fault Ground Current 0 50000 1 A F23 01F44 Fault Voltage Phase A 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F45 Fault Voltage Phase B 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F46 Fault Voltage Phase C 0 110 1 x CT F3 01F47 Fault Current Lag Voltage 0 359 1 degrees F1 01F48 Fault System Frequency 250 700 1 Hz F2 6001F49 Stator RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F4A Bearing RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F4B Other RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

1F4C Ambient RTD Fault Temperature -40 200 1 oC F4 40

... ...1F7F Reserved

TEST OUTPUT RELAYS

0 = continuous

1F80 Force Trip Relay 0 2 1 - FC150 01F81 Force Trip Relay Duration 1 301 1 s F1 3011F82 Force AUX1 Relay 0 2 1 - FC150 01F83 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 1 301 1 s F1 3011F84 Force AUX2 Relay 0 2 1 - FC150 01F85 Force AUX2 Relay Duration 1 301 1 s F1 3011F86 Force Alarm Relay 0 2 1 - FC150 01F87 Force Alarm Relay Range 1 301 1 s F1 3011F81 Reserved

...1F8F Reserved

TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS 1F90 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - FC126 01F91 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F92 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F93 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F94 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F95 Reserved

...1FFE Reserved2000 Reserved

---2FFF Reserved

Event Recorder / Trace Memory (Addresses 3000 -3FFF)EVENT RECORDER 3000 Event Recorder Last Reset (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A

3002 Total Number of Events Since Last Clear 0 65535 1 N/A F1 03003 Event Record Selector (1=newest, 40=oldest) 1 40 1 N/A F1 13004 Cause of Event 0 40 1 - FC134 03005 Time of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A3007 Date of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A3009 Reserved300A Reserved300B Event Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F9 0300C Event Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F9 0300D Event Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F9 0300E Event Motor Load 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0300F Event Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 03010 Event Ground Current 0 50000 1 A F23 03011 Reserved - - - - - -3012 Event Hottest Stator RTD 0 12 1 - F1 03013 Event Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 o C F4 0

...301A Event Voltage Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0301B Event Voltage Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 0301C Event Voltage Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 0301D Event Voltage Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0301E Event Voltage Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



A301F Event Voltage Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 03020 Event System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 03021 Event Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F12 03022 Event Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F12 03023 Event Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 03024 Event Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 03025 Reserved

... ...30EF Reserved

WAVEFORM CAPTURE 30F0 Trace Memory Channel Selector 0 9 1 - F1 030F1 Trace Memory Date N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A30F3 Trace Memory Time N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A30F5 Reserved

...30FF Reserved3100 First Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 0

... ...3400 Last Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 031C0 Reserved

... ...3FFF Reserved


GROUPADDR(hex)


VALUEUNITS

FORMATCODE

FACTORYDEFAULT



AA.1.2 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS

Table A–2: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 12)

FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION

F1 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE

Example: 1234 stored as 1234

F2 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE

Example: 123.4 stored as 1234

F3 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES

Example: 12.34 stored as 1234

F4 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE

Example: -1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)

F5 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACES

Example: -123.4 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)







F9 32 bits UNSIGNED LONG VALUE

1st 16 bits High Order Word of Long Value

2nd 16 bits Low Order Word of Long Value

Example: 123456 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex)

F10 32 bits UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE



Example: 12345.6 stored as 123456 (i.e. 1st word: 0001 hex, 2nd word: E240 hex)

F11 32 bits UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES




F12 32 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE



Example: -123456 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex)

F13 32 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE



Example: -12345.6 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex)

F14 32 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES



Example: -1234.56 stored as -123456 (i.e. 1st word: FFFE hex, 2nd word: 1DC0 hex)



AF15 16 bits HARDWARE REVISION

0000 0000 0000 0001 1 = A

0000 0000 0000 0010 2 = B

... ...

0000 0000 0001 1010 26 = Z

F16 16 bits SOFTWARE REVISION

1111 1111 xxxx xxxx Major Revision Number

0 to 9 in steps of 1

xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 Minor Revision Number (two BCD digits)

00 to 99 in steps of 1

Example: Revision 2.30 stored as 0230 hex

F17 32 bits UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES




F18 32 bits DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)

1st byte Month (1 to 12)

2nd byte Day (1 to 31)

3rd and 4th byte Year (1995 to 2094)

Example: Feb 20, 1995 stored as 34867142 (i.e. 1st word: 0214, 2nd word 07C6)

Feb = 02, 20th = 14, 1995 = 07C6 thus 021407C6hex = 34867142decimal

F19 32 bits TIME (HH:MM:SS:hh)

1st byte Hours (0 to 23)

2nd byte Minutes (0 to 59)

3rd byte Seconds (0 to 59)

4th byte Hundreds of seconds (0 to 99) - Not used by 369

Example: 2:05pm stored as 235208704 (i.e. 1st word: 0E05, 2nd word 0000)

F20 32 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE



Note: -1 means “Never”

F21 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES (Power Factor)

< 0 Leading Power Factor - Negative

> 0 Lagging Power Factor - Positive

Example: Power Factor of 0.87 lag is used as 87 (i.e. 0057)

F22 16 bits TWO 8-BIT CHARACTERS PACKED INTO 16-BIT UNSIGNED

MSB First Character

LSB Second Character

Example: String ’AB’ stored as 4142 hex.

FC23 16 Bits Unsigned Value (For 1A/5 A CT, 1Decimal Place) (For 50: 0.025 A CT, 2 Decimal Places)

Example: For 1A/5A CT, G/F current = 1000.0 A

Example: For 50: .025 A CT, G/F current = 25.00

F26 16 Bits Analog Output Selection

0 0 - 1mA

1 0 - 20 mA

2 4 - 20 mA

F30 16 Bits Disable / Enable Selection

0 Disabled

1 Enabled


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AF31 16 Bits Command Function Codes

0 Not in use

1 Reset 369

2 Motor Start

3 Motor Stop

4 Waveform Trigger

FC100 Unsigned 16 bit integer Temperature Display Units

0 Celsius

1 Fahrenheit

FC101 Unsigned 16 bit integer RS 485 Baud Rate

0 1200 baud

1 2400 baud

2 4800 baud

3 9600 baud

4 19200 baud

FC102 Unsigned 16 bit integer RS 485 Parity

0 None

1 Odd

2 Even

FC103 Unsigned 16 bit integer Off / On or No / Yes Selection

0 Off / No

1 On / Yes

FC104 Unsigned 16 bit integer Ground CT Type

0 None

1 1 A Secondary

2 5 A Secondary

3 Multilin CT 50/0.025

FC105 Unsigned 16 bit integer CT Type

0 None

1 1 A Secondary

2 5 A Secondary

FC106 Unsigned 16 bit integer Voltage Transformer Connection Type

0 None

1 Open Delta

2 Wye

FC107 Unsigned 16 bit integer Nominal Frequency

0 60 Hz

1 50 Hz

2 Variable

FC108 Unsigned 16 bit integer Reduced Voltage Starting Transition On

0 Current Only

1 Current or Timer

2 Current and Timer

FC109 Unsigned 16 bit integer Starter Status Switch

0 Starter Aux a (52a)

1 Starter Aux b (52b)


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AFC110 Unsigned 16 bit integer Emergency Restart Switch Input Function

0 Off

1 Emergency Switch

2 General Switch

3 Digital Counter

4 Waveform Capture

5 Simulate Pre - Fault

6 Simulate Fault

7 Simulate Pre - Fault to Fault

FC111 Unsigned 16 bit integer Trip Relays

0 none

1 Trip

2 Aux1

3 Aux2

4 Trip & Aux1

5 Trip & Aux2

6 Aux1 & Aux2

7 Trip & Aux1 & Aux2

FC112 Unsigned 16 bit integer Not Defined

0

1

FC113 Unsigned 16 bit integer Alarm Relays

0 None

1 Alarm

2 Aux1

3 Aux2

4 Alarm & Aux1

5 Alarm & Aux2

6 Aux1 & Aux2

7 Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2

FC114 Unsigned 16 bit integer Counter Type

0 Increment

1 Decrement

FC115 Unsigned 16 bit integer Alarm/Trip Type Selection

0 Off

1 Latched

2 Unlatched

FC116 Unsigned 16 bit integer Switch Type

0 Normally Open

1 Normally Closed

FC117 Unsigned 16 bit integer Reset Mode

0 All Resets

1 Remote Reset Only

2 Keypad Reset Only

FC119 Unsigned 16 bit integer Backup Relays

0 None

1 Aux 1

2 Aux1 & Aux2

3 Aux2


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AFC120 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD Type

0 100 Ohm Platinum

1 120 Ohm Nickel

2 100 Ohm Nickel

3 10 Ohm Copper

FC121 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD Application

0 None

1 Stator

2 Bearing

3 Ambient

4 Other

FC122 Unsigned 16 bit integer Local / Remote RTD Voting Selection

0 Off

1 RTD #1

2 RTD #2

3 RTD #3

4 RTD #4

5 RTD #5

6 RTD #6

7 RTD #7

8 RTD #8

9 RTD #9

10 RTD #10

11 RTD #11

12 RTD #12

13 All Stator

FC123 Unsigned 16 bit integer Alarm Status

0 Off

1 Not Active

2 Timing Out

3 Active

4 Latched

FC124 Unsigned 16 bit integer Phase Rotation at Motor Terminals

0 ABC

1 ACB

FC125 Unsigned 16 bit integer Starter Type

0 Breaker

1 Contactor


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AFC127 Unsigned 16 bit integer Analog Output Parameter Selection

0 Phase A Current

1 Phase B Current

2 Phase C Current

3 Average Phase Current

4 AB Line Voltage

5 BC Line Voltage

6 CA Line Voltage

7 Average Line Voltage

8 Phase AN Voltage

9 Phase BN Voltage

10 Phase CN Voltage

11 Average Phase Voltage

12 Hottest Stator RTD

13 Local RTD #1

14 Local RTD #2

15 Local RTD #3

16 Local RTD #4

17 Local RTD #5

18 Local RTD #6

19 Local RTD #7

20 Local RTD #8

21 Local RTD #9

22 Local RTD #10

23 Local RTD #11

24 Local RTD #12

25 Remote RTD #1

26 Remote RTD #2

27 Remote RTD #3

28 Remote RTD #4

29 Remote RTD #5

30 Remote RTD #6

31 Remote RTD #7

32 Remote RTD #8

33 Remote RTD #9

34 Remote RTD #10

35 Remote RTD #11

36 Remote RTD #12

37 Power Factor

38 Reactive Power (kvar)

39 Real Power (kW)

40 Apparent Power (KVA)

41 Thermal Capacity Used

42 Relay Lockout Time

43 Current Demand

44 kvar Demand

45 kW Demand

46 kVA Demand

47 Motor Load

48 MWhrs

FC128 Unsigned 16 bit integer Curve Style

0 Standard

1 Custom

FC130 Unsigned 16 bit integer Digital Input Pickup Type

0 Over

1 Under


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AFC131 Unsigned 16 bit integer Input Switch Status

0 Open

1 Closed

FC133 Unsigned 16 bit integer Motor Status

0 Stopped

1 Starting

2 Running

3 Overloaded

4 Tripped

FC134 Unsigned 16 bit integer Cause of Event / Cause of Last Trip (up to 40)

0 No Event / No Trip To Date

1 Reserved

2 Speed Switch Trip

3 Differential Trip

5 General Spare Switch Trip

6 General Emergency Restart Switch Trip

7 General Diferential Switch Trip

8 General Speed Switch Trip

9 General Reset Switch. Trip

10 Reserved

11 Overload Trip

12 Short Circuit Trip

13 Short Circuit Backup

14 Mechanical Jam Trip

15 Undercurrent Trip

16 Current Unbalance Trip

17 Single Phasing Trip

18 Ground Fault Trip

19 Ground Fault Backup

20 Reserved

21 Acceleration Trip

22 Start Inhibit

23 Starts/Hour Inhibit

24 Time Between Starts Inhibit

25 Restart Block

26 Backspin Inhibit

27 Reserved

28 Undervoltage Trip

29 Overvoltage Trip

30 Phase Reversal Trip

31 Underfrequency Trip

32 Overfrequency Trip

33 Reserved

34 Lead Power Factor Trip

35 Lag Power Factor Trip

36 Positive kvarTrip

37 Negative kvar Trip

38 Underpower Trip

39 Reverse Power Trip

40 Reserved

41 Local RTD 1 Trip

42 Local RTD 2 Trip

43 Local RTD 3 Trip

44 Local RTD 4 Trip

45 Local RTD 5 Trip


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



A46 Local RTD 6 Trip

47 Local RTD 7 Trip

48 Local RTD 8 Trip

49 Local RTD 9 Trip

50 Local RTD 10 Trip



53 Reserved

54 Remote RTD 1 Trip










64 Remote RTD 11Trip


66 Reserved

67 General Spare Switch Alarm

68 General Emergency Switch Alarm

69 General Differential Switch Alarm

70 General Speed Switch Alarm

71 General Reset Switch Alarm

72 Reserved

73 Thermal Capacity Alarm

74 Overload Alarm

75 Mechanical Jam Alarm

76 Undercurrent Alarm

77 Current Unbalance Alarm

78 Ground Fault Alarm

79 Reserved

80 Undervoltage Alarm

81 Overvoltage Alarm

82 Over Frequency Alarm

83 Under Frequency Alarm

84 Reserved

85 Power Factor Lead Alarm

86 Power Factor Lag Alarm

87 Reactive Power Positive Alarm

88 Reactive Power Negative Alarm

89 Underpower Alarm

90 Reverse Power Alarm

91 Reserved

92 Local RTD 1 Alarm













FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



A104 Local RTD 1 High Alarm

105 Local RTD 2 High Alarm











116 Reserved

117 Remote RTD 1 Alarm












129 Remote RTD 1 High Alarm












141 Reserved

142 Open RTD Alarm

143 Lost RRTD Communication Alarm

144 Short/Low RTD Alarm

145 Reserved

146 Trip Counter Alarm

147 Current Demand Alarm

148 KW Demand Alarm

149 kvar Demand Alarm

150 kVA Demand Alarm

151 Digital Counter Alarm

152 Service Alarm

153 Control Power Lost

154 Cont. Power Applied

155 Emergency Rst. Close

156 Emergency Rst. Open

157 Start While Blocked

158 Reserved

159 Starter Fail Alarm

160 Breaker Failure

161 Welded Contactor


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



A162 Incomplete Sequence Trip

163 Reserved

164 Simulation Started

165 Simulation Stopped

166 Reserved

167 Reserved

168 Waveform Capture

169 Reserved

FC135 Unsigned 16 bit integer Motor Speed

0 Low Speed (Speed 1)

1 High Speed (Speed 2)

FC136 Unsigned 16 bit integer Option (0 = PATICULAR OPTION NOT INSTALLED)

bit 0 1 = Profibus Option

bit 1 1 = Fibre Optic Option

bit 3 - bit 2 0 - 0 = No Metering or Backspin Options

0 - 1 = Metering Option

1 - 0 = Backspin Option

bit 4 1 = Internal RTD Option

bit 5 1 = HI Power Supply

0 = Lo Power Supply

bit 6 - bit 15 Unused

FC138 Unsigned 16 bit integer Simulation Mode

0 Off

1 Simulate Pre-Fault

2 Simulate Fault

3 Pre-Fault to Fault

FC139 Reserved Reserved

FC141 Unsigned 16 bit integer Output Relay Status

bit 0 Trip

bit 1 Alarm

bit 2 Auxiliary 1

bit 3 Auxiliary 2

FC143 Unsigned 16 bit integer Single VT Selection

0 Off

1 AN (Wye) AB (Delta)

2 BN (Wye) BC (Delta)

3 CN (Wye) N/A (Delta)

FC 149 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Channel 3 Application

0 MODBUS

1 RRTD

FC150 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Output Relay Status

0 Forced

1 Energized

2 De - Energized

FC151 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Channel Type

0 RS 485

1 Fiber Optic


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



AFC152 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Number of Records

0 1 * 64 cycles

1 2 * 32 cycles

2 4 * 16 cycles

3 8 * 8 cycles

FC156 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Remote RRTD Communication Status

0 RRTD Module Communication Lost

1 RRTD Communication on Line

FC157 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Differential Switch Input Function

0 OFF

1 Differential Switch

2 General Switch

3 Digital Counter

4 Waveform Capture


6 Simulate Fault

7 Simulate Pre-Fault to Fault

FC158 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Speed Switch Input Function

0 OFF

1 Speed Switch

2 General Switch

3 Digital Counter

4 Waveform Capture


6 Simulate Fault


FC159 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Spare Switch Input Function

0 OFF

1 Starter Status Switch

2 General Switch

3 Digital Counter

4 Waveform Capture


6 Simulate Fault


FC160 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Reset Switch Input Function

0 OFF

1 Reset Switch

2 General Switch

3 Digital Counter

4 Waveform Capture


6 Simulate Fault


FC161 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Output Relay Fail Safe Code (0 = Failsafe, 1 = Nonfailsafe)

0 Failsafe

1 Non Failsafe

FC162 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer Access Level

0 Read Only

1 Read / Write

2 Factory Service


FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION



ATable A–2: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 12 of 12)

FORMATCODE

TYPE DEFINITION

GE Power Management L90 Line Differential Relay B- 1

APPENDIX B B.1 CHANGE NOTES

B

APPENDIX B REVISIONSB.1 CHANGE NOTES B.1.1 REVISION HISTORY

B.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3

Table B–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 369 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO

1601-0077-B1 53CMB105.000 07 May 1999

1601-0077-B2 53CMB110.000 08 June 1999 369-082

1601-0077-B3 53CMB110.000 15 June 1999 369-085

Table B–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B3

Page(369-B2)

Change FromTo

(page of 369-B3)

1-2 Hi Power Supply : 50-300 VDC/ 40-265 VAC

Hi Power Supply : 90-300 VDC / 70-265VAC

1-2

2-7 to 2-9 Various dropout levels changed to 96-98%

Old Dropout levels 97 -98 % 2-7 to 2-9

5-6 Setpoint Access menus changed 5-6

5-7 Display Preferences menu changed 5-72-7 to 2-9

5-50 Backspin Detection menu changed 5-50

Various Various ranges and memory maplocations changed

Various

369 Motor Management Relay C- 1

APPENDIX C C.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

C

APPENDIX C WARRANTYC.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTYGeneral Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manu-factures to be free from defects in material and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of ship-ment from factory.

In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertaketo repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that itis defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid toan authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacementunder warranty will be made without charge.

Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to mis-use, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accor-dance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GEMultilin authorized factory outlet.

GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damagesor for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay mal-function, incorrect application or adjustment.

For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers),refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.

369 Motor Management Relay i

INDEX

IND

EX

INDEX

Numerics

2 PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ................................. 7-25269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ...................... 3-5369

electrical installation .................................................. 3-8functional summary ................................................... 1-4general overview ....................................................... 1-1mechanical installation .............................................. 3-1pc interface ............................................................... 4-5typical wiring ............................................................. 3-9typical wiring diagram ................................................ 3-8

369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES ................................... 3-95A

ground CT installation .............................................. 3-23input ......................................................................... 8-3

86 LOCKOUT SWITCH ................................................ 7-6

A

A1 STATUS ................................................................. 6-3A2 METERING DATA ................................................... 6-9A3 LEARNED DATA ................................................... 6-16A4 STATISTICAL DATA ............................................. 6-20A5 EVENT RECORD .................................................. 6-23A6 RELAY INFORMATION ......................................... 6-25ACCELERATION TRIP ....................................... 5-47, 7-14ACCESSORIES ........................................................... 1-2ACTUAL VALUES ........................................................ 6-1

main menu ................................................................ 6-1overview ................................................................... 6-1page 1 menu ............................................................. 6-3page 2 menu ............................................................. 6-9page 3 menu ........................................................... 6-16page 4 menu ........................................................... 6-20page 5 menu ........................................................... 6-23page 6 menu ........................................................... 6-25

ADDITIONAL FEATURES ............................................. 2-4ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TING .............................. 8-11ALARM STATUS .......................................................... 6-6AMBIENT TEMPERATURE........................................... 2-9ANALOG

inputs and outputs ..................................................... 8-8outputs ................................................... 3-14, 3-15, 5-77outputs (Option M) ..................................................... 2-6

APPLICATION........................... 5-50, 5-59, 5-62, 5-63, 5-66, 5-67, 5-70example .................................................................. 5-41

APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ................................... 2-9AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING ................ 7-33

B

BACK PORTS (3) ......................................................... 2-6BACKSPIN

detection ................................................................. 5-50voltage inputs .......................................................... 3-13

BEARING RTDS ........................................................ 7-15BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) ............................................ 2-6

C

CLEAR/PRESET DATA ...............................................5-13COMMUNICATIONS ..................................... 2-6, 5-8, 10-1CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 4-7CONTROL

functions ..................................................................5-22power ...............................................................3-9, 3-16

COOL TIME CONSTANTS ..........................................7-18CORE BALANCE CONNECTION .................................. 7-3CRC-16 ALGORITHM .................................................10-3CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE............................4-10CT

burden ...................................................................... 7-8circuit ....................................................................... 7-9secondary resistance ................................................. 7-8selection ................................................................... 7-8size andsaturation ..................................................... 7-7withstand .................................................................. 7-7

CT AND VTpolarity ..................................................................... 7-4

CT/VT SETUP ............................................................5-16CURRENT

metering ................................................................... 6-9unbalance ................................................................5-42

CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE ....................................5-30

D

DATAframe format and data rate .......................................10-1packet format ...........................................................10-2

DEMAND ....................................................................5-20metering ..................................................................6-14

DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................ 2-9DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ............................................5-73DIGITAL INPUT ........................................................... 7-6

functiondigital counter .................................................5-76general switch.................................................5-75simulate fault ..................................................5-76simulate pre-fault .............................................5-76simulate pre-fault to fault ...................................5-76waveform capture ............................................5-76

status ....................................................................... 6-7trip coil supervision ................................................... 8-7

DISPLAY ..................................................................... 4-1preferences ............................................................... 5-7

DO’S AND DON’TS ...................................................... 7-4DOWNLOAD

setpoint file to 369 ....................................................4-12DUST/MOISTURE ................................................2-9, 2-10

E

EDITING A SETPOINT FILE ........................................4-11ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ...................................... 3-8ELECTRICAL INTERFACE ..........................................10-1EMERGENCY RESTART ............................................5-73EMI ............................................................................2-10ENABLE

ii 369 Motor Management Relay

INDEX

IND

EX

RTD biasing .............................................................7-13start inhibit ...............................................................7-14

ENVIRONMENATAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................ 2-9ENVIRONMENT..........................................................2-10ERROR

checking ..................................................................10-3responses .............................................................. 10-12

EVENT RECORD ......................................................... 2-6EVENT RECORDER ................................................. 10-14EVENT RECORDING ..................................................4-21

F

FACEPLATE ................................................................ 4-1interface ................................................................... 4-1

FAQ ............................................................................ 7-2FAST TRANSIENTS....................................................2-10FAULT SETUP ...........................................................5-81FIBER OPTIC PORT (OPTION F) ................................. 2-6FIRMWARE

history ...................................................................... 1-3version .....................................................................6-25

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ............................ 7-2FRONT PORT ............................................................. 2-6

communicating .......................................................... 7-2FUNCTION ...5-39, 5-40, 5-41, 5-44, 5-47, 5-48, 5-50, 5-56,

5-57, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61, 5-62, 5-63, 5-66, 5-67, 5-68, 5-69,5-70

FUNCTION CODE03 and 04 - read setpoints and actual values .............10-505 - execute operation ..............................................10-606 - store single setpoint ..........................................10-707 - read device status .............................................10-808 - loopback test .....................................................10-916 - performing commands ..................................... 10-1116 - store multiple setpoints .................................... 10-10

G

GROUND(1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ........................................ 8-3accuracy test ............................................................. 8-4bus ........................................................................... 7-4CT .................................................................. 5-16, 7-12current input .............................................................3-10fault ................................................................ 5-44, 7-14fault detection

ungrounded systems ........................................7-27filter .......................................................................... 7-4safety ....................................................................... 7-4

GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS .................................. 2-1

H

HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING .......................... 8-2HGF GROUND CT INSTALLATION

3” and 5” window ......................................................3-248” window ................................................................3-25

HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO ................................ 5-35, 7-13HUMIDITY ...........................................................2-9, 2-10

I

IMPULSE TEST ............................................................2-9INITIAL START CAPACITY .........................................7-23INPUTS ........................................................................2-5INSTALLATION ............................................................3-1

electrical ....................................................................3-8mechanical ................................................................3-1options and accessories ...........................................5-14upgrade .....................................................................4-5

INSULATION RESISTANCE ........................................2-10INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING ................................1-1

K

KEYPAD ......................................................................4-3

L

LAG POWER FACTOR ...............................................5-67LAST TRIP DATA .........................................................6-5LEAD POWER FACTOR .............................................5-66LEARNED START CAPACITY .....................................7-23LED INDICATORS ........................................................4-2LOCAL / REMOTE RTD OPERATION ..........................5-55LOCAL RTD ...............................................................6-12

maximums ...............................................................6-18protection ................................................................5-51

M

MAJOR UPDATES ....................................................... B-1MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ......................................3-1MECHANICAL JAM ............................................ 5-40, 7-14MEMORY MAP ......................................................... 10-13

data formats .............................................................. A-1information ............................................................. 10-13

MESSAGEformat and example ... 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 10-10,

10-11scratchpad ...............................................................5-11

METERED QUANTITIES ...............................................2-4METERING ..................................................................2-6MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ........................................10-1MODEL INFORMATION ..............................................6-25MONITORING SETUP ................................................5-18MOTOR

cooling .....................................................................5-33data .........................................................................6-16FLC .........................................................................7-12statistics ..................................................................6-22status .................................................................6-4, 6-6status detection ........................................................7-16thermal limits ...........................................................7-11

MPM-369conversion terminal list ...............................................3-6

MTM-369conversion terminal list ...............................................3-6

369 Motor Management Relay iii

INDEX

IND

EX

N

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER.................................. 5-69

O

OPEN RTD ALARM .................................................... 5-56OPERATION .............................................................. 5-21ORDERING ................................................................. 1-2OUTPUT RELAYS....................................... 2-6, 3-16, 8-10

setup ...................................................................... 5-21OUTPUTS ................................................................... 2-6OVERFREQUENCY ................................................... 5-63OVERLOAD

alarm ...................................................................... 5-37curve ...................................................................... 7-13curve test ................................................................ 8-11curves ..................................................................... 5-25pickup ..................................................................... 7-12

OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL ........................ 2-7OVERVIEW ................................................................. 5-1OVERVOLTAGE ........................................................ 5-60

P

PC PROGRAM(software) history ...................................................... 1-3

PC SOFTWAREobtaining ................................................................... 7-2

PHASECT .................................................................. 5-16, 7-11CT installation ......................................................... 3-22current (CT) inputs .................................................... 3-9current accuracy test ................................................. 8-2line voltage input(VT) (Option M) ................................ 2-5reversal ................................................................... 5-61voltage (VT/PT) inputs ............................................. 3-12VT .......................................................................... 5-16

PHASORS ......................................................... 4-19, 6-15POLARITY

CT and VT ................................................................ 7-4POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ................................... 5-68POWER

measurement test .................................................... 8-11metering .................................................................. 6-11metering (option m) ................................................... 2-6

PRE-FAULT SETUP ................................................... 5-80PRINTING ................................................................. 4-14PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ........................................... 2-1PRODUCTION TESTS ............................................... 2-10PROFIBUS PORT (OPTION P) ..................................... 2-6PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ....................................... 7-10PROTECTION ELEMENTS ........................................... 2-7PROTOCOL ............................................................... 10-1

R

REAL TIME CLOCK ........................................5-9, 6-7, 6-8REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER ................................ 7-30REDUCED VOLTAGE START CONTROL

............................................................................... 5-23

RELAY LABEL DEFINITION ......................................... 1-5REMOTE RESET ........................................................5-74REMOTE RTD ............................................................6-13

maximums ................................................................6-19module electrical installation .....................................3-20module mechanical installation .................................3-19protection .................................................................5-53

RESET .......................................................................5-21RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT CONNECTION ................ 7-3REVERSE POWER .....................................................5-71REVISION HISTORY ................................................... B-1RFI ............................................................................2-10RS232

communicating .......................................................... 7-2program port ............................................................. 4-2

RS4854 wire ....................................................................... 7-2cable ........................................................................ 7-5communication difficulties .......................................... 7-2communications .......................................................3-17communications port .................................................. 7-5converter .................................................................. 7-5distances .................................................................. 7-5full duplex ................................................................. 7-2interfacing master device ........................................... 7-5repeater .................................................................... 7-5

RTD ....................................................................3-14, 7-42 wire lead compensation .........................................7-32accuracy test ............................................................. 8-4bias .........................................................................5-36bias maximum ..........................................................7-13bias mid point ...........................................................7-13bias minimum ...........................................................7-13circuitry ....................................................................7-29grounding .................................................................. 7-6inputs ......................................................................3-14inputs (Option r) ........................................................ 2-6stator .......................................................................7-15

RUNNING COOL TIME ...............................................7-13

S

S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS .............................................5-77S11 369 TESTING ......................................................5-79S2 SYSTEM SETUP ...................................................5-15S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION ....................................5-23S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ..........................................5-38S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS ....................................5-46S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ............................................5-51S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ...........................................5-58S8 POWER ELEMENTS ..............................................5-64S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ...................................................5-72SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ...................... 8-1SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ........................5-22SETPOINTS ................................................................ 5-1

access ...................................................................... 5-6entry ......................................................................... 4-4main menu ................................................................ 5-1page 1 menu ............................................................. 5-5page 10 menu ..........................................................5-77page 11 menu ..........................................................5-79page 2 menu ............................................................5-15page 3 menu ............................................................5-23page 4 menu ............................................................5-38

iv 369 Motor Management Relay

INDEX

IND

EX

page 5 menu ............................................................5-46page 6 menu ............................................................5-51page 7 menu ............................................................5-58page 8 menu ............................................................5-64page 9 menu ............................................................5-72

SHORT CIRCUIT ........................................................5-39test ..........................................................................8-15trip ...........................................................................7-14

SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM ................................5-56SIMULATION MODE ...................................................5-79SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-2SPARE SWITCH .........................................................5-73SPEED SWITCH .........................................................5-74START INHIBIT ........................................ 5-48, 7-18, 7-23

enabled ....................................................................7-23STARTER FAILURE....................................................5-20STARTS/HOUR ..........................................................7-15STATOR RTDS ...........................................................7-15STOPPED COOL TIME ...............................................7-13STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT ............................7-18SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ..........................10-5SUPPORTED OPERATIONS .......................................10-6SYSTEM ....................................................................5-17

T

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................... 2-5TEMPERATURE .........................................................2-10TERMINAL

identification ............................................................. 3-3layout ....................................................................... 3-7list ............................................................................ 3-3

TESTanalog outputs .........................................................5-83burn in .....................................................................2-10calibration and functionality ......................................2-10dielectric strength .....................................................2-10ground accuracy ........................................................ 8-4hardware functional ................................................... 8-2input accuracy ........................................................... 8-2output relays ............................................................5-82overload curve .........................................................8-11phase current accuracy ............................................. 8-2power measurement .................................................8-11production ................................................................2-10RTD accuracy ........................................................... 8-4secondary injection ................................................... 8-1setup ........................................................................ 8-1short circuit ..............................................................8-15type test standards .................................................... 2-9unbalance ................................................................8-12voltage

metering ........................................................6-10phase reversal ................................................8-14

THERMALcapacity calculation ..................................................7-21

capacity used ...........................................................7-21limit .........................................................................7-18limit curves ..............................................................7-22model ......................................................................5-24

TIME BETWEEN STARTS ...........................................7-15TIMING ......................................................................10-4TRENDING .................................................................4-15TRIP COUNTER ................................................ 5-19, 6-20TRIP RELAY ..............................................................3-16TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................4-23TWO PHASE WIRING .................................................7-25TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ....................7-32TYPE TEST STANDARDS.............................................2-9

U

UNBALANCEalarm and trip ...........................................................7-14bias .........................................................................5-31bias k factor .............................................................7-12bias of thermal capacity ............................................7-12test ..........................................................................8-12

UNDERCURRENT ............................................. 5-41, 7-14UNDERFREQUENCY ..................................................5-62UNDERPOWER ..........................................................5-70UNDERVOLTAGE .......................................................5-59UPGRADING

relay firmware ............................................................4-8setpoint file to new revision ......................................4-13

USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA .................. 10-13USER INTERFACE

introduction ................................................................4-5

V

VIBRATION ..................................................................2-9VOLTAGE

input accuracy test .....................................................8-2metering ..................................................................6-10phase reversal test ...................................................8-14

VT SETTINGS ............................................................7-12

W

WARRANTY ................................................................ C-1information ................................................................ C-1

WAVEFORM CAPTURE ....................2-6, 4-17, 5-10, 10-14WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................3-8

Z

ZERO SEQUENCEground CT placement ...............................................3-11

369 Man

Documents

Transcript of 369 Man